Copy

This category describes the copying features.



Basic Copying Method

This section describes the basic procedure for copying.

  1. Place documents on the platen glass or load them in the ADF.
  • Close the ADF/platen glass cover after placing your documents.
  1. Press [COPY].
  • If you press and hold [OK] in the copy mode, a sample page will be printed. For details, see "Printing a Sample Page."
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  • The copy quantity appears on the right side of the display.
  • If you make a mistake when entering values, press [Clear] and enter the correct values.
  • You cannot change the copy quantity while the machine is copying.
  1. Press [Start].


Canceling Copy Jobs

You can cancel scanning or ongoing jobs.


Remark
  • If you cancel a copy job during scanning, make sure to remove the document.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset].
  1. When the <CANCEL COPYING?> message appears, press [] to select <YES>.

The job is canceled, and the copy quantity is reset.



Selecting Image Quality (Copy)

You can adjust the image quality of copies according to the types of documents. A correct selection is necessary for the optimal reproduction of the colors of the document. These settings return to the default values if the machine remains idle for a certain period of time or if you press [Stop/Reset].
The default settings is <TEXT/PHOTO>.


Remark
  • Combinations of these four modes (TEXT/PHOTO, TEXT, PHOTO, TEXT/PHOTO+) cannot be selected at the same time. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
  • If the document is a transparency, select the document type, then adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the document.
  1. Place documents.

For details, see "Placing Documents."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Image Quality] repeatedly to select the document type.
  • <TEXT/PHOTO>: For documents that contain text and photos
  • <TEXT>: For text documents
  • <PHOTO>: For documents that contain fine text or photos
  • <TEXT/PHOTO+>: For documents that contain fine text and photos
  • Copy density automatically changes to the manual mode when <TEXT/PHOTO>, <PHOTO>, or <TEXT/PHOTO+> is set.
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple documents using the platen glass, place a document and press [Start] once for each page. When scanning is complete, press [OK].



Adjusting Density (Copy)

You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the document either automatically or manually.
The default setting is <MANUAL>(5).


Adjusting Automatically (Copy)

Adjusting Manually (Copy)


Adjusting Automatically (Copy)

Return to Overview

You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the document automatically.

  1. Place documents.

For details, see "Placing Documents."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Density] twice to select <AUTO>, then press [OK].
  • The image quality is automatically set to <TEXT>.
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple documents using the platen glass, place a document and press [Start] once for each page. When scanning is complete, press [OK].



Adjusting Manually (Copy)

Return to Overview

You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the document manually.

  1. Place documents.

For details, see "Placing Documents."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Density] to select the manual mode.
  1. Press [] or [] to adjust the copy density, then press [OK].
  • []: to make light documents darker
  • []: to make dark documents lighter
  • To cancel all settings, press [Stop/Reset].
  • When you switch the mode by pressing the mode keys such as [FAX], all settings will be canceled. If you want to keep the settings, set the density as follows:
    [Menu] → <COPY SETTINGS> → <STANDARD SETTINGS> → <DENSITY> → <MANUAL> (See "COPY SETTINGS.")
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple documents using the platen glass, place a document and press [Start] once for each page. When scanning is complete, press [OK].



Enlarge/Reduce Images

You can convert a standard-sized document to a different standard-sized copy (preset zoom), or you can enlarge or reduce images in 1% increments (custom copy ratio).
The default setting is <100%>.


Preset Zoom

Custom Copy Ratio


Preset Zoom

Return to Overview

You can enlarge or reduce standard size documents to another standard paper size.

  1. Place document.

For details, see "Placing Documents."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Enlarge/Reduce].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the copy ratio, then press [OK].
  • <200% MAX.>
  • <129% STMT → LTR>
  • <100%>
  • <78% LGL → LTR>
  • <64%>
  • <50% MIN.>
  • When <PAPER SIZE GROUP> in the <COPY SETTINGS> menu is set to <A> or <AB>, the preset copy ratios change as follows:
    A: 50%, 70%, 100%, 141%, 200%
    AB: 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, 115%, 122%, 141%, 200%
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple documents using the platen glass, place a document and press [Start] once for each page. When scanning is complete, press [OK].



Custom Copy Ratio

Return to Overview

You can enlarge or reduce images by any copy ratio, in 1% increments. The available copy ratios are from 50% to 200%.

  1. Place documents.

For details, see "Placing Documents."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Enlarge/Reduce] twice.
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the copy ratio, then press [OK].

You can also use [] or [] to adjust the zoom ratio. To increase the zoom ratio, press []. To decrease the copy ratio, press [].

  • To return the copy ratio to 100%, press [Enlarge/Reduce] repeatedly to display <100%>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple documents using the platen glass, place a document and press [Start] once for each page. When scanning is complete, press [OK].



Collating Copies

You can sort copies into sets arranged in page order. This function is useful when making handouts for meetings. This feature can be used together with both "2-Sided Copying" and "Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1)."
The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Place documents.

For details, see "Placing Documents."

  1. Press [COPY].
  • If <AUTO COLLATE> is set to <ON> in <STANDARD SETTINGS> in <COPY SETTINGS>, skip to step 4.
  1. Press [Collate/2 on 1], then press [OK].
  • If you want to use <COLLATE> and "2 on 1 Combination" at the same time, select <COLLATE+2 ON 1>, then press [OK].
  • If you want to use <COLLATE> and the 2-sided copying at the same time, go to step 3 of "1 to 2-Sided Copying," "2 to 2-Sided Copying (MF4380dn Only)," or "2 to 1-Sided Copying (MF4380dn Only)."
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press [Start].
  • If you want to copy multiple documents using the platen glass, place a document and press [Start] once for each page. When scanning is complete, press [OK]. The machine prints the remaining sets of copies.
  • To cancel all settings, press [Stop/Reset].
  • When you switch the mode by pressing the mode keys such as [FAX], all settings will be canceled. If you want to keep the settings, set the collate mode as follows:
    [Menu] → <COPY SETTINGS> → <STANDARD SETTINGS> → <AUTO COLLATE> → <ON> (See "COPY SETTINGS.")
  • When scanning multiple page documents, <MEMORY FULL> may appear in the display and scanning may be canceled. If this happens, press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1)

This mode enables you to reduce two-page documents to fit on one sheet of paper (1-sided/2-sided).


2 on 1 Combination

Copying ID Card


2 on 1 Combination

Return to Overview

2 on 1 mode automatically reduces two documents to fit on the selected paper size. You can make well-organized copies by copying multiple documents onto one sheet. This mode enables you to cut print costs by saving copy papers, and it is also useful for saving space. This feature can be used together with both "Collating Copies" and "2-Sided Copying."
The default setting is <OFF>.


Remark
  • The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the documents fit onto the selected paper size.
  1. Place documents.

For details, see "Placing Documents."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Collate/2 on 1] repeatedly to select <2 ON 1>, then press [OK].
  • If you want to use <2 ON 1> and "Collating Copies" at the same time, select <COLLATE+2 ON 1>, then press [OK].
  • If you want to use <2 ON 1> and the 2-sided copying at the same time, go to step 3 of "1 to 2-Sided Copying," "2 to 2-Sided Copying (MF4380dn Only)," or "2 to 1-Sided Copying (MF4380dn Only)."
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press [Start].
  • If you want to copy multiple documents using the platen glass, place a document and press [Start] once for each page. When scanning is complete, press [OK].
  • To cancel all settings, press [Stop/Reset].
  • A maximum of 1/8" (4 mm) margin will be produced between the two reduced documents in 2 on 1 copying.


Copying ID Card

Return to Overview

You can make a copy of a 2-sided card onto one side of a paper. This mode is useful when copying ID cards.


Remark
  • You must place a document on the platen glass when using this function.
  • The zoom ratio will automatically be set to <100%> with this feature. You cannot change the copy size.
  • The paper size you can use is LTR or A4. If you select other paper size in the paper size setting, the ID card copy function will be canceled automatically.
  • When you select the ID card copy, the other copy settings you made, such as the copy ratio and paper size, will be canceled automatically.
  • This function cannot be used with the 2 on 1 mode, the collating mode, or the 2-sided copying mode.
  1. Place a card on the platen glass.
  • Place a card as indicated below.

  • Align the center of a card with the arrow mark.
  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Collate/2 on 1] repeatedly to select <ID CARD COPY>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press [start].
  1. Turn and place the card.
  • Place the card as indicated below.

  • Align the center of a card with the arrow mark.
  1. Press [start].
  • To cancel all settings, press [Stop/Reset].


2-Sided Copying

This mode enables you to make 2-sided copies from 1-sided documents, or make 1-sided copies from 2-sided documents. This enables you to cut print costs in half when copying in large quantities.
This feature can be used together with both "Collating Copies" and "2 on 1 Combination."
The default setting is <OFF>.


Remark
  • Paper used to make 2-sided copies must conform to the following specifications:
  • Paper size: LTR and A4 (envelopes cannot be used for 2-sided copying)
  • Paper weight: 17 to 21 lb (64 to 80 g/m2)

1 to 2-Sided Copying


2 to 2-Sided Copying (MF4380dn Only)


2 to 1-Sided Copying (MF4380dn Only)



1 to 2-Sided Copying

Return to Overview

You can make 2-sided copies from 1-sided documents.

  1. Place documents.

For details, see "Placing Documents."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [2-Sided] to select <1 > 2-SIDED>, then press [OK].
  • If there are odd number of documents when the 1-Sided to 2-Sided mode is used, the back side of the last copy is left blank.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <BOOK TYPE> or <CALENDAR TYPE>, then press [OK].
  • <BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation.
  • <CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the copy will have the opposite top-bottom orientation.
  • For the landscape oriented documents:
    When <BOOK TYPE> is selected, the front and back sides of the copy will have the opposite top-bottom orientation.
    When <CALENDAR TYPE> is selected, the front and back sides of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation.
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple documents using the platen glass, place a document and press [Start] once for each page. When scanning is complete, press [OK].

  • To cancel all settings, press [Stop/Reset].
  • When you switch the mode by pressing the mode keys such as [FAX], all settings will be canceled. If you want to keep the settings, store the settings as follows:
    [Menu] → <COPY SETTINGS> → <STANDARD SETTINGS> → <2-SIDED> (See "COPY SETTINGS.")
  • You can skip step 4. In this case, the machine scans 1-sided documents to make 2-sided, <BOOK TYPE> copies.


2 to 2-Sided Copying (MF4380dn Only)

Return to Overview

You can make 2-sided copies from 2-sided documents.

  1. Place documents in the ADF.

For details, see "Placing Documents."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [2-Sided] repeatedly to select <2 > 2-SIDED>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <BOOK TYPE> or <CALENDAR TYPE> for the document layout, then press [OK].
  • <BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document will have the same top-bottom orientation.
  • <CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document will have the opposite top-bottom orientation.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <BOOK TYPE> or <CALENDAR TYPE> for the output layout, then press [OK].
  • <BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation.
  • <CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the copy will have the opposite top-bottom orientation.
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press [Start].
  • To cancel all settings, press [Stop/Reset].
  • When you switch the mode by pressing the mode keys such as [FAX], all settings will be also canceled. If you want to keep the settings, store the settings as follows:
    [Menu] → <COPY SETTINGS> → <STANDARD SETTINGS> → <2-SIDED> (See "COPY SETTINGS.")
  • You can skip steps 4 and 5. In this case, the machine scans 2-sided documents in the <BOOK TYPE> orientation and outputs the same way.
  • If you press [Start] in step 4 after selected <CALENDAR TYPE>, the machine scans 2-sided documents in the <CALENDAR TYPE> orientation and outputs the same way.


2 to 1-Sided Copying (MF4380dn Only)

Return to Overview

You can make 1-sided copies from 2-sided documents.

  1. Place documents in the ADF.

For details, see "Placing Documents."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [2-Sided] repeatedly to select <2 > 1-SIDED>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <BOOK TYPE> or <CALENDAR TYPE>, then press [OK].
  • <BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document have the same top-bottom orientation.
  • <CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document will have the opposite top-bottom orientation.
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
  1. Press [Start].
  • To cancel all settings, press [Stop/Reset].
  • When you switch the mode by pressing the mode keys such as [FAX], all settings will be also canceled. If you want to keep the settings, store the settings as follows:
    [Menu] → <COPY SETTINGS> → <STANDARD SETTINGS> → <2-SIDED> (See "COPY SETTINGS.")
  • You can skip step 4. In this case, the machine scans 2 -sided documents in the <BOOK TYPE> orientation to make 1-sided copies.


Selecting Paper Size Group

This section describes how to select the paper size group.
The default setting is <INCHES>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COPY SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAPER SIZE GROUP>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a paper size group, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper size groups: <INCHES>, <A>, <AB>



Changing Standard Mode (Copy)

The Standard mode is the combination of copy modes that the machine automatically applies when the power is turned ON, or when [Stop/Reset] is pressed. You can change the Standard mode to suit your needs.

The default settings are the followings:

  • <IMAGE QUALITY>: <TEXT/PHOTO>
  • <DENSITY>: <MANUAL> (5)
  • <ZOOM RATIO>: <100%>
  • <AUTO COLLATE>: <OFF>
  • <2-SIDED>: <OFF>
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COPY SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <STANDARD SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired setting item, then press [OK].

You can specify the following settings:

  • <IMAGE QUALITY>
  • <DENSITY>
  • <ZOOM RATIO>
  • <AUTO COLLATE>
  • <2-SIDED>
  • If you press [Stop/Reset] before pressing [OK], the setting will not be registered.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  • Press [Menu] to return to the previous display.


Printing a Sample Page

This machine enables you to print a sample page. You can use this function to test how the printouts will look with current settings.


Remark
  • The paper size must be LTR.
  • The paper type must be Plain Paper (17 to 21 lb (64 to 80 g/m2)).
  • If the paper setting is not appropriate or the paper is not loaded correctly, printing does not start without any error messages.
  • You cannot cancel printing a sample page once printing has started.
  • You cannot use this function while making copies, scanning documents, or printing reports/lists.
  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press and hold [OK].

The sample page will be printed on the both sides of the paper.



Viewing Copy Settings

You can check the current copy settings for <COLLATE>, <2-SIDED>, <2 ON 1>, and <ID CARD COPY>.

  1. Press [Job Cancel/Status Monitor] repeatedly to select <VIEW SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

The current settings for <COLLATE>, <2-SIDED>, <2 ON 1>, and <ID CARD COPY> appear on the LCD display.



Fax

This category describes how to use the fax function.



Introduction to Using Fax Functions

This section describes the things that you must do before using fax functions.
Make sure to set the following items first:

  • Your fax number

Register your machine's fax number. (See "Register User Telephone Number and Unit Name.")

  • Your personal name or company name

Register your name or company name. (See "Register User Telephone Number and Unit Name.")

  • Date and time

Set the current date and time. (See "Setting the Date and Time.")

  • Your telephone line type

Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine. (See "Setting the Type of Telephone Line (Fax).")

  • Fax receiving mode

Set how the machine receives fax documents to suit your needs. (See "Selecting the Receive Mode (Fax).")



Sending Fax Documents

This section describes the settings and procedures for sending fax documents.


Basic Methods for Sending Faxes

Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents (Manual Sending)

Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing (Fax)

Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses) (Fax)

Canceling Sending Fax Documents

Specifying Destinations (Fax)

Specifying a New Fax Number


Using the One-Touch Keys (Fax)


Using Coded Dial Codes (Fax)


Using the Group Addresses (Fax)


Using the Address Book Key (Fax)


Sending Documents to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (Fax)


Adjusting Density (Fax)

Selecting Image Quality (Fax)

2-Sided Document (Fax) (MF4380dn Only)

Registering Your Machine's Fax Number

Setting the Type of Telephone Line (Fax)

Redialing When the Line Is Busy (Fax)

Redialing Manually


Redialing Automatically


Checking the Dial Tone before Sending (Fax)

Registering the Machine's Name (Fax)

Changing Standard Mode (Fax)

Send Start Speed (Fax)


Basic Methods for Sending Faxes

Return to Overview

This section describes the flow of sending faxes.

  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [FAX].
  1. Adjust any necessary scan settings for your documents.

For details, see "Adjusting Density (Fax)," "Selecting Image Quality (Fax)," and "2-Sided Document (Fax) (MF4380dn Only)."

  1. Specify the fax number with - , [numeric keys] and [Tone].

If you enter a wrong number when specifying a fax number, press [Stop/Reset].

  1. Press [Start].

When you place the documents on the platen glass, press [] or [] to select the document size, then press [Start] for each document. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents (Manual Sending)

Return to Overview

Use manual sending when you want to talk to the recipient before sending a document, or if the recipient does not have a fax machine that can receive automatically.


Remark
  • You cannot use the platen glass for manual sending.
  • You cannot use group addresses for manual sending.
  • You cannot use 2-Sided scanning mode for manual sending.
  1. Connect an external telephone to the machine if you want to talk to the recipient before sending a document.

For information on how to connect an external telephone to the machine, see "Connect Telephone Cables."

  1. Place documents in the ADF.
  1. Press [FAX].
  1. Adjust any necessary settings for your documents.

For details, see "Adjusting Density (Fax)," "Selecting Image Quality (Fax)," and "2-Sided Document (Fax) (MF4380dn Only)."

  1. Press [Hook] or pick up the handset of your external telephone.

If you press [Hook], you can temporarily adjust the monitor tone volume with [] and [].

  1. Dial the recipient's fax number.
  • Make sure to confirm the dial tone before entering a fax number. If you enter the number before the dial tone can be heard, the call may not connect, or the wrong number may be dialed.
  1. Talk through the handset to the recipient.
  • If you press [Hook] in step 5, you can pick up the handset when you hear the recipient's voice.
  • If you hear a high-pitched signal instead of the recipient's voice, go to step 9.
  1. Ask the recipient to set their fax machine to receive faxes.
  1. When you hear a high-pitched signal, press [Start], then hang up the handset.

Scanning starts, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.



Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing (Fax)

Return to Overview

If your machine is set for pulse dialing, use the procedure below to switch to tone dialing to use information services (e.g., banks, airline reservations, and hotel reservations).


Remark
  • To talk to the other party, you will need to connect an external telephone to the machine.
  1. Press [FAX].
  1. Press [Hook].
  • Make sure to confirm the dial tone before entering a fax number. If you enter the number before the dial tone can be heard, the call may not be connected, or the wrong number may be dialed.
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to dial the required information service.
  1. When the recorded message of the information service answers, press [Tone] to switch to tone dialing.
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the numbers requested by the information service.
  1. If you want to receive faxes, press [Start].

If you are using the external telephone, hang up the handset after pressing [Start].



Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses) (Fax)

Return to Overview

When you dial or register an overseas number, you may need to insert a pause within the number.

  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [FAX].
  1. Adjust any necessary scan settings for your documents.

For details, see "Adjusting Density (Fax)," "Selecting Image Quality (Fax)," and "2-Sided Document (Fax) (MF4380dn Only)."

  1. Use - [numeric keys] to dial the international access code.

For details on international access codes, contact your local telephone company.

  1. If necessary, press [Redial/Pause] to insert a pause.
  • The letter <P> is displayed between the numbers.
  • <P> in the fax/telephone number represents 2.5-second pause.
  • For a longer pause, press [Redial/Pause] again.
  1. Enter the country code, the area code, and the fax/telephone number of the recipient.
  1. Press [Redial/Pause] to enter a pause at the end of the number.
  1. Press [Start].

When you place the documents on the platen glass, press [] or [] to select the document size, then press [Start] for each document. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

  • If <CONFIRM FAX NO.> in <ACCESS TO DEST.> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> is set to <ON> and you specify a fax number using - , [numeric keys] and [Tone], you need to enter the fax number again for confirmation, then press [OK].


Canceling Sending Fax Documents

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress.


Remark
  1. Press [Stop/Reset].
  1. When the <CANCEL DURING TX/RX?> message appears, press [] to select <YES>.
  • For sending jobs, remove any unscanned documents from the ADF.
  • If you are in the copy or scan standby mode and want to cancel a fax job, press [FAX] to return to the fax mode first.


Specifying Destinations (Fax)

Return to Overview

This section describes how to specify a fax destination. You can select a destination stored in a one-touch key or coded dial codes, or specify a new destination.



Specifying a New Fax Number

Return to Overview

You can specify a new fax number using - , [numeric keys], and [Tone].

  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [FAX].
  1. Adjust any necessary scan settings for your documents.

For details, see "Adjusting Density (Fax)," "Selecting Image Quality (Fax)," and "2-Sided Document (Fax) (MF4380dn Only)."

  1. Enter the fax number with - , [numeric keys] and [Tone].

If you entered a wrong number when specifying a fax number, press [Stop/Reset].

  1. Press [Start].

When you place the documents on the platen glass, press [] or [] to select the document size, then press [Start] for each document. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

  • If <CONFIRM FAX NO.> in <ACCESS TO DEST.> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> is set to <ON> and you specify a fax number using - , [numeric keys] and [Tone], you need to enter the fax number again for confirmation, then press [OK].


Using the One-Touch Keys (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can specify up to eight destinations using one-touch keys.


Remark
  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [FAX].
  1. Adjust any necessary scan settings for your documents.

For details, see "Adjusting Density (Fax)," "Selecting Image Quality (Fax)," and "2-Sided Document (Fax) (MF4380dn Only)."

  1. Press the desired one-touch key (01 to 08).

If you pressed a wrong key, press [Stop/Reset], then try again from step 3.

  1. Press [Start].

When you place the documents on the platen glass, press [] or [] to select the document size, then press [Start] for each document. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Using Coded Dial Codes (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can specify up to 100 destinations using coded dial codes.


Remark
  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [FAX].
  1. Adjust any necessary scan settings for your documents.

For details, see "Adjusting Density (Fax)," "Selecting Image Quality (Fax)," and "2-Sided Document (Fax) (MF4380dn Only)."

  1. Press [Coded Dial].
  1. Enter the desired two-digit code (00 to 99) with - [numeric keys].

If you entered a wrong code, press [Stop/Reset], then try again from step 3.

  1. Press [Start].

When you place the documents on the platen glass, press [] or [] to select the document size, then press [Start] for each document. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Using the Group Addresses (Fax)

Return to Overview

Group Dialing enables you to specify a group of registered destinations in one-touch keys. This is useful if you want to send the same document to several destinations. You can register up to 50 destinations in one group.


Remark
  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [FAX].
  1. Adjust any necessary scan settings for your documents.

For details, see "Adjusting Density (Fax)," "Selecting Image Quality (Fax)," and "2-Sided Document (Fax) (MF4380dn Only)."

  1. Press the one-touch key under which the desired group dialing is registered.

If you pressed a wrong key, press [Stop/Reset], then try again from step 3.

  1. Press [Start].

When you place the documents on the platen glass, press [] or [] to select the document size, then press [Start] for each document. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Using the Address Book Key (Fax)

Return to Overview

[Address Book] search enables you to search for a recipient registered in the machine. This is useful when you forget which one-touch key or coded dial code the recipient you want is registered under.


Remark
  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [FAX].
  1. Adjust any necessary scan settings for your documents.

For details, see "Adjusting Density (Fax)," "Selecting Image Quality (Fax)," and "2-Sided Document (Fax) (MF4380dn Only)."

  1. Press [Address Book] repeatedly to select <NAME SEARCH> or <ADD/TEL SEARCH>, then press [OK].
  • <NAME SEARCH>: Searches a destination by name.
  • <ADD/TEL SEARCH>: Searches a destination by fax number.
  • If no recipient is registered in the Address Book, <NOT REGISTERED> is displayed.
  1. Enter the first letter of the recipient's name or the first part of the fax number with - and [numeric keys].
  • For example, if you want to search for a name that starts with the letter "C", press (ABC). Entries starting with the letter you entered are displayed if any entries are registered.
  • When you select <NAME SEARCH> in step 4, you can switch the input mode by pressing [Tone].

[:A]: Letter mode

[:1]: Number mode

  1. Press [] or [] to search for the recipient.
  • []: Displays recipients in alphabetical order.
  • []: Displays recipients in reverse order.
  1. When the desired recipient is displayed, press [OK].
  1. Press [Start].

When you place the documents on the platen glass, press [] or [] to select the document size, then press [Start] for each document. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Sending Documents to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (Fax)

Return to Overview

Broadcasting enables you to send the same document to multiple recipients.


Remark
  • Up to 124 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 124 destinations, 16 numbers can be specified with - , [numeric keys] and [Tone].) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination in the group is counted as a separate address.
  • If you frequently send documents to multiple destinations, it is recommended that you store those destinations as a group.
  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <BROADCAST>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the destination.

Use - , [numeric keys] and [Tone], one-touch keys, coded dial codes, or [Address Book] to specify destinations.

  • You can enter up to 16 different fax numbers using - , [numeric keys] and [Tone].
  • Make sure to press [OK] after entering the recipient's number if you use - [numeric keys].
  1. Repeat step 4 to enter all required recipients.
  • To check all the specified destinations, press [] or [] to scroll the display.
  1. Press [Start].

When you place the documents on the platen glass, press [] or [] to select the document size, then press [Start] for each document. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

  • If <CONFIRM FAX NO.> in <ACCESS TO DEST.> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> is set to <ON> and you specify a fax number using - , [numeric keys] and [Tone], you need to enter the fax number again for confirmation, then press [OK].


Adjusting Density (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the document you send.

  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [FAX].
  1. Press [Density].
  1. Press [] or [] to adjust the density, then press [OK].
  • []: to make light documents darker.
  • []: to make documents lighter.
  1. Specify the destination and send your documents.

For details, see "Specifying Destinations (Fax)."



Selecting Image Quality (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can adjust the image quality of the document you send. The higher image quality you set, the better the output will be, but the longer the transmission will take.
The default setting is <STANDARD>.

  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [FAX].
  1. Press [Image Quality] repeatedly to select the image quality, then press [OK].
  • <STANDARD>: for most text-only documents (200 x 100 dpi)
  • <FINE>: for fine-print documents (the resolution is twice that of <STANDARD>) (200 x 200 dpi)
  • <PHOTO>: for documents that contain photographs (the resolution is twice that of <STANDARD>) (200 x 200 dpi)
  • <SUPER FINE>: for documents that contain fine print and images (the resolution is four times that of <STANDARD>) (200 x 400 dpi)
  1. Specify the destination and send your documents.

For details, see "Specifying Destinations (Fax)."



2-Sided Document (Fax) (MF4380dn Only)

Return to Overview

You can set the machine to automatically turn over 2-sided documents that are placed in the ADF, and scan each side separately.

  1. Place documents in the ADF.
  1. Press [FAX].
  1. Press [2-Sided] repeatedly to select the binding type, then press [OK].
  • <2-SIDED BOOK>: The front and back sides of the document have the same top-bottom orientation.
  • <2-SIDED CALENDAR>: The front and back sides of the document have opposite top-bottom orientations.
  1. Specify the destination and send your documents.

For details, see "Specifying Destinations (Fax)."



Registering Your Machine's Fax Number

Return to Overview

Your machine's fax number must be registered. When you send a document, the number that you registered is printed on the recipient's paper. For information on registering the fax number, see "Register User Telephone Number and Unit Name."



Setting the Type of Telephone Line (Fax)

Return to Overview

Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine.
If this setting is incorrect, you will be unable to communicate with other machines. Make sure to check the type of telephone line that you are using, and make the correct setting.
The default setting is <TOUCH TONE>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TEL LINE TYPE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the telephone line type, then press [OK].
  • <TOUCH TONE>: Tone dialing (default)
  • <ROTARY PULSE>: Pulse dialing
  • If you do not know the telephone line type, call your telephone service provider for details.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Redialing When the Line Is Busy (Fax)

Return to Overview

If the recipient's line is busy or if there is no answer, you can redial the same fax number manually or set the machine to redial automatically.


Redialing Manually

Redialing Automatically


Redialing Manually

Return to Overview

  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [FAX].
  1. Press [Redial/Pause].
  • When <RESTRICT REDIAL> is set to <ON> in the <ACCESS TO DEST.> of the <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu, redialing is not available.
  1. Press [Start].

When you place the documents on the platen glass, press [] or [] to select the document size, then press [Start] for each document. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Redialing Automatically

Return to Overview

Automatic redialing enables the machine to automatically redial the recipient's fax number if the recipient cannot be reached due to a busy line, or if a sending error occurs. Auto Redial can be turned <ON> or <OFF>. If you set <AUTO REDIAL> to <ON>, you can set how many times the machine redials the number, and the redial interval.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <AUTO REDIAL>: ON
  • <REDIAL TIMES>: 2TIMES
  • <REDIAL INTERVAL>: 2MIN.
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <AUTO REDIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or - [numeric keys] to enter the number of redials (1 to 10 times) the machine will make, then press [OK].
  • Regardless of the number you entered, the machine makes only one redialing attempt if it does not detect a busy signal.
  1. Use [], [], or - [numeric keys] to enter the time (2 to 99 minutes, in one-minute increments) between redials, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Checking the Dial Tone before Sending (Fax)

Return to Overview

The following redirection problem may happen with certain kinds of fax machines on the market made by companies other than Canon. The DIALING LINE CHCK mode prevents this rare occurrence from happening.
If you are sending a fax document from your machine at the same time another fax machine (made by a company other than Canon) is trying to send you a fax, your fax document may end up being redirected to that fax machine, instead of the document destination you had intended.
Setting <DIALING LINE CHCK> to <ON> enables you to avoid such sending problems.
The default setting is <OFF>.


Remark
  • The DIALING LINE CHCK mode is enabled only after you disconnect the power cord, then connect the cord again.
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DIALING LINE CHCK>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Registering the Machine's Name (Fax)

Return to Overview

Your name or company's name must be registered as the machine's name.
When you send a document, the name that you registered is printed as the sender's name on the recipient's paper. For information on registering the unit name, see "Register User Telephone Number and Unit Name."



Changing Standard Mode (Fax)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to specify the standard scan settings for density and image quality.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <STANDARD SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired setting item, then press [OK].

You can specify the following settings:

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Send Start Speed (Fax)

Return to Overview

This function enables you to change the send start speeds, which is useful when there is difficulty initiating the sending of a document.
The default setting is <33600bps>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Password has been set, enter the System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNICATIONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX START SPEED>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired start speed, then press [OK].

If your document transmission is slow in starting, this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select <33600bps>, <14400bps>, <9600bps>, <7200bps>, <4800bps>, or <2400bps>.

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Receiving Faxes

This section describes the settings and procedures for receiving fax documents.


Remark
  • Printing fax documents and scanning documents over the network cannot be processed at the same time. If this happens, these documents are handled differently depending on the following:
  • If you scan documents when the machine is receiving fax documents, or the machine receives fax documents when scanning documents, the machine scans documents first, then starts printing the fax documents when scanning is complete.
  • If you scan documents when the machine is printing received fax documents, scanning is canceled. Wait for the fax documents to be printed out, then perform the scanning operation again.

Methods for Receiving Faxes

FaxOnly


FAX/TEL


AnsMode


MANUAL


DRPD


Selecting the Receive Mode (Fax)

Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (Fax)

Reducing a Received Document (Fax)

Printing Footer Information on a Received Document (Fax)

Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Runs Out (Fax)

Setting the Incoming Ring (Fax)

Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote RX) (Fax)

Activating the Remote Reception (Fax)


Receiving Documents with the Remote Reception (Fax)


Selecting the Receive Mode for Printing (Fax)

Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the Unidentified Senders (Fax)

Receive Start Speed (Fax)

Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception) (Fax)

Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode (Fax)


Methods for Receiving Faxes

Return to Overview

Your machine provides several methods for receiving fax documents. You can receive documents automatically or manually. Follow the chart below to choose the fax receive mode that best suits your needs.
The default setting is <FaxOnly>.



FaxOnly

Return to Overview

In this mode, the machine receives documents automatically. Select this mode if you use the machine for fax operations only, and not for voice communications using an external telephone.

  • Before using this mode

Simply set the receive mode to <FaxOnly>. (See "Selecting the Receive Mode (Fax).")

  • When an incoming call is received
  • With no external telephone connected to the machine:
  • For fax calls, the machine receives fax documents automatically.
  • For telephone calls, you cannot talk to the caller.
  • With external telephone connected to the machine:


Remark


FAX/TEL

Return to Overview

In this mode, the machine receives documents automatically for fax calls and rings for telephone calls.

  • Before using this mode

Make sure to do the following:

  • When an incoming call is received


Remark


AnsMode

Return to Overview

In this mode, the machine receives documents automatically for fax calls and your answering machine records a message for telephone calls.

  • Before using this mode

Make sure to do the following:

  • Set your answering machine to answer after 1 to 2 rings.
  • Record a message on your answering machine. (When you record a message, we recommend you insert about 4 seconds of silence at the beginning of the message, or limit the message to 20 seconds.)
  • When an incoming call is received


Remark
  • This mode does not support voice mail.
  • Make sure to change the receive mode if you turn off your answering machine; otherwise, the machine cannot receive fax documents automatically.


MANUAL

Return to Overview

In this mode, you can monitor all incoming calls by picking up the handset each time your telephone rings. This mode is a suitable option if you expect to use the machine mainly as a telephone, and only occasionally receive fax documents.

  • Before using this mode

Make sure to do the following:

  • When an incoming call is received

*If <REMOTE RX> is set to <ON>, you can also start to receive fax documents by dialing from your telephone. (See "Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote RX) (Fax).")



DRPD

Return to Overview

DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) service assigns two or more telephone numbers with distinctive ring patterns to a single telephone line, allowing you to have both a fax number(s) and a telephone number(s) using only one telephone line. Your fax will automatically monitor incoming calls and based on the ring pattern, will let you know if the call is a fax or voice call. Set the fax ring pattern that matches the pattern assigned by your telephone company. Contact your telephone company for availability.

  • Before using this mode

Make sure to do the following:

  • Subscribe to a DRPD service. Contact your telephone campany for availability.


Selecting the Receive Mode (Fax)

Return to Overview

Select the fax receive mode to suite your needs.
The default setting is <FaxOnly>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX MODE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired receive mode, then press [OK].

For <FAX/TEL> and <DRPD>, you can specify optional settings.


  • If you select <FAX/TEL>:

  • 1. Press [] or [] to select <RING START TIME>, then press [OK].

  • 2. Press [] or [] to specify the duration (4 to 30 seconds) for which the machine attempts to detect the fax tone before it starts ringing, then press [OK].
  • If the machine receives a fax, the machine does not ring and switches to the receive mode automatically.
  • The default setting is <6SEC>.

  • 3. Press [] or [] to select <F/T RING TIME>, then press [OK].

  • 4. Press [] or [] to specify the duration (10 to 45 seconds) of ringing, then press [OK].
  • The default setting is <22SEC>.

  • 5. Press [] or [] to select <F/T SWITCH ACTION>, then press [OK].

  • 6. Press [] or [] to select the action the machine will take after the ringing ends, then press [OK].
  • <RECEIVE>: Receives a fax.
  • <DISCONNECT>: Disconnects the call.

  • If you select <DRPD>:

  • 1. Press [] or [] to select a ring pattern, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  • If you cannot make telephone calls using an external telephone when the receive mode is set to <FAX/TEL>, make the settings described below.
    [MENU] → <FAX SETTINGS> → <USER SETTINGS> → set <PUBLIC LINE> to <ADAPTER 1>. If the problem persists, set <PUBLIC LINE> to <ADAPTER 2>.
    * The default setting is <DIRECT>.
    If you set <PUBLIC LINE> to <ADAPTER 1> or <ADAPTER 2>, do not connect the supplied telephone cable directly to the wall jack and the telephone line jack on the back side of the machine.


Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can print received documents on both sides of the paper you select. This enables you to save paper.
The default setting is <OFF>.


Remark
  • You can print the received documents on both sides of the paper only when <PAPER SIZE> is set to <LTR> or <A4>. The received documents are printed on one side of the paper when <PAPER SIZE> is not set to <LTR> or <A4>. (See "Setting Paper Size and Type.")
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <2-SIDED PRINT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Reducing a Received Document (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set the machine to automatically reduce received documents so that the whole document is printed within the printable area of the paper.
The default setting is <ON>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX REDUCTION>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired setting, then press [OK].
  • <ON>: Reduces the documents automatically depending on the length of the documents.
  • <OFF>: Prints documents on a paper without reducing the size.
  • <CUT>: Cuts off the end of a document that does not fit on one page up to 24 mm. When the height of the area to be cut off is more than 24 mm, the document will be printed on the following page without being cut off.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Printing Footer Information on a Received Document (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set whether to insert the machine's fax number and the sender information on received faxes.
The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX TERMINAL ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Runs Out (Fax)

Return to Overview

This function enables you to continue printing received fax documents or reports when the toner has run out.
The default setting is <OFF>.


Remark
  • When <CONT. PRINTING> is set to <ON>, the printed documents may be light or blurred because of lack of toner. The data is erased when the documents are printed out, so you cannot print the same documents again.
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CONT. PRINTING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Setting the Incoming Ring (Fax)

Return to Overview

This function enables you to activate the ring alert of the external telephone if <RX MODE> is set to <FaxOnly>. Selecting <ON> enables you to distinguish between the fax reception and answer voice calls when you pick up the external telephone while it is ringing.
The default setting is <ON>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <INCOMING RING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to set the number of ring times, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote RX) (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can connect one external telephone to the machine.
When the telephone rings with the machine in the MANUAL receive mode, you can use the external telephone to start receiving the document without walking over to the machine.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <REMOTE RX>: ON
  • <REMOTE RX ID>: 25

Activating the Remote Reception (Fax)

Receiving Documents with the Remote Reception (Fax)


Activating the Remote Reception (Fax)

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to turn on the remote reception.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REMOTE RX>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter a remote reception ID (a combination of two characters using 0 to 9), then press [OK].
  • The default ID is 25. If you do not want to change the ID, press [OK] without entering any numbers.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Receiving Documents with the Remote Reception (Fax)

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to receive fax documents using the remote reception.


Remark
  • Before using the remote reception to receive fax documents, make sure the followings:
  • An external telephone is connected properly.
  • Your telephone is set to tone dialing.
  1. When you receive a call, pick up the external telephone.
  1. When you hear a beep, use - [numeric keys] to enter the two-digit remote reception ID to start reception.

If you hear someone on the line, you can start talking to the other party.

  1. When the reception is complete, hang up the telephone.


Selecting the Receive Mode for Printing (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can select whether the machine stores all received pages in the memory before printing them out or prints each page as it is received.
The default setting is <MEMORY RX>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX PRINT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired printing method, then press [OK].
  • <MEMORY RX>: Prints after all the pages of the document are received.
  • <PRINT RX>: Prints each page as it is received.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the Unidentified Senders (Fax)

Return to Overview

This function enables you to reject incoming faxes from senders who do not transmit their fax numbers (telephone numbers) to your machine. This can be useful when you do not want to receive direct mail (DM).
The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX RESTRICTION>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Receive Start Speed (Fax)

Return to Overview

This function enables you to change the receive start speeds, which is useful when there is difficulty initiating the receiving of a document.
The default setting is <33600bps>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Password has been set, enter the System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNICATIONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX START SPEED>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired receive speed,, then press [OK].

If your document reception is slow in starting, this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select <33600bps>, <14400bps>, <9600bps>, <7200bps>, <4800bps>, or <2400bps>.

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception) (Fax)

Return to Overview

Normally a document prints as soon as you receive it. However, there may be occasions when you want the machine to store all documents in memory until you are ready to print them. Locking the machine to receive and store all documents in memory is called memory lock reception.
The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Password has been set, enter the System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNICATIONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MEMORY LOCK>, then press [OK].

If the memory lock password has been set, enter the password using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  • When you select <OFF>, the machine starts to print the received documents in memory.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PASSWORD>, then press [OK].
  1. If you want to set or change a password for the Memory Lock mode, use - [numeric keys] to enter the memory reception password (up to seven digits), then press [OK].
  • If you set a password, it will be necessary to enter the password whenever you want to change the Memory Lock mode settings, or cancel the Memory Lock mode.
  • If you do not want to set the Memory Lock with a password, press [OK] without entering any numbers.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MEMORY RX TIME>, then press [OK].

If you do not need to set the timer for memory lock, skip to step 12.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the start time (in 24-hour format), then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the end time (in 24-hour format), then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode (Fax)

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to print documents received when the machine is in the memory lock reception mode.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Password has been set, enter the System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNICATIONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MEMORY LOCK>, then press [OK].

If the memory lock password has been set, enter the password using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF>, then press [OK].

The received documents are printed.

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Forwarding Received Fax Documents in Memory

You can redirect the fax documents received in memory to the specified destination.

  1. Press [Job Cancel/Status Monitor] repeatedly to select <TX/RX STATUS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the job you want to transfer, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FORWARD>, then press [OK].
  1. Press the desired one-touch key or [Coded Dial] followed by the two-digit code to select the destination, then press [Start].


Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory

The Status Monitor screen enables you to view and change the status of fax documents in memory.


Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents

Checking/Deleting Fax Reception Documents

Checking the Fax Log


Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents

Return to Overview

You can check the detailed information of fax documents currently being sent or waiting to be sent, then delete unwanted documents as necessary.

  1. Press [Job Cancel/Status Monitor] repeatedly to select <TX/RX STATUS> or <JOB CANCEL>, then press [OK].

If you select <JOB CANCEL>, press [] or [] to select <TX/RX>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to scroll trough the job list.

If you want to delete a job, go to the next step. Otherwise, press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.

  1. Press [] or [] to select the job you want to delete, then press [OK].
  • For <BROADCAST>, all recipients entered for a broadcasting job will be canceled.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CANCEL>, then press [OK].

If you select <JOB CANCEL> in step 1, you do not need to perform this procedure. Go to the next step.

  1. Press [] to select <YES>.

If you do not want to cancel the job, press [] to select <NO>.

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Checking/Deleting Fax Reception Documents

Return to Overview

You can delete the received documents in memory. You can also forward received documents in memory to a desired destination.

  1. Press [Job Cancel/Status Monitor] repeatedly to select <TX/RX STATUS> or <JOB CANCEL>, then press [OK].

If you select <JOB CANCEL>, press [] or [] to select <TX/RX>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to scroll trough the job list.

If you want to delete a job, go to the next step. Otherwise, press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.

  1. Press [] or [] to select the job you want to delete, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CANCEL>, then press [OK].

If you select <JOB CANCEL> in step 1, you do not need to perform this procedure. Go to the next step.

  1. Press [] to select <YES>.

If you do not want to cancel the job, press [] to select <NO>.

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Checking the Fax Log

Return to Overview

You can view the results of fax transactions that list all faxes sent or received.

  1. Press [Job Cancel/Status Monitor] repeatedly to select <TX/RX LOG>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to view the required transmission/reception result.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


PC Fax

This category describes how to send faxes from computers.



System Requirements (PC Fax)

The fax driver can be used in the following system environments:

  • Operating System Software
  • Windows 2000
  • Windows XP
  • Windows Server 2003
  • Windows Vista
  • Windows 7
  • Windows Server 2008
  • With a Server-Based Computing Environment
  • Compatible Windows Terminal Server (Service)
  • Windows 2000 Server
  • Windows Server 2003
  • Windows Server 2008
  • Compatible Software
  • Citrix MetaFrame XP
  • Citrix MetaFrame 1.8
  • Citrix MetaFrame Presentation Server 3.0
  • Citrix Presentation Server 4.0
  • Computer

Any computer which runs the above operating system software properly.



Where to Find Help (PC Fax)

Here is where to get immediate help if you are having problems installing or using the fax driver.


  • README. TXT file

Any hints, enhancements, limitations, and restrictions you need to be aware of when installing and using your fax driver are included in the README.TXT file provided with the driver. This file is located in the [DRIVERS] folder.

  • Online Help

You can locate additional help for questions you may have regarding your fax in the Online Help file provided with the driver. In the fax properties dialog box, you can click [Help] to display additional information about every feature and option in the fax driver.

  • Canon Authorized Dealers or Service Providers

If the Online Help file does not provide the information you need, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or service provider.



Faxing Fundamentals (PC Fax)

This section describes the fundamental operations of the fax driver, such as how to display the fax driver, and how to send a fax from a computer.


Faxing a Document (PC Fax)

Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand (PC Fax)

Viewing the Online Help (PC Fax)


Faxing a Document (PC Fax)

Return to Overview

The procedure for faxing a document created in application software is as follows.


Remark
  • Faxing methods may differ depending on the application you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals provided with the application software.
  • Up to 256 fax transmission recipients can be stored in the device. If the number of recipients exceeds 256 after a fax job has been sent to the device, the last job to be input will be erased. Be careful when registering more than 256 recipients in groups or when sending a fax continuously to multiple groups.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  • Sending documents from a computer and scanning documents over the network cannot be processed at the same time. If this happens, these documents are handled differently depending on the following:
  • If you send PC documents when the machine is scanning documents, the machine scans documents first, then starts sending the PC documents when scanning is complete.
  • If you scan documents when the machine is sending PC documents, scanning is canceled. Wait for the PC documents to be sent out, then perform the scanning operation again.
  1. Open the document you want to fax from the application.
  1. Select [Print] from the [File] menu.

The [Print] dialog box is displayed.

  • The procedure for displaying the [Print] dialog box may differ depending on the application you are using.
  1. Select your fax from [Name], then click [Properties].

The fax driver screen is displayed.

  • The fax name displayed in the fax driver screen is changed by settings in the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes]).
    See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand (PC Fax)" to display the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes]).
  • The procedure for displaying the fax driver screen may differ depending on the applications you are using.
  1. Configure the required settings in the fax driver screen, then click [OK].

The [Print] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Click [OK].

The [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Specify recipient name and fax number in the [Sending Settings] sheet → click [Add to Recipient List].

  • The number of recipients to which you can send simultaneously depends on the conditions of cover sheet attachment. For details, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
  • You cannot access or edit the address book if you do not have access permission (default: Power Users or higher) to the destination folder of the address book. If this is the case, log on as user having access permission to the folder, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and specify a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, that you have write permission for as the destination folder of the address book.
  1. If you want to attach a cover sheet, select [Cover Sheet] sheet → specify a format for the cover sheet.

  1. Click [OK].

Faxing starts.



Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand (PC Fax)

Return to Overview

To fax a document, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • When faxing, you can change the settings you configured beforehand. To change the settings, configure them from the application.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].

The [Printers] folder is displayed.

  • If you are using Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows Server 2008, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Devices and Printers].
  1. Right-click the icon of the fax whose settings you want to configure → click [Printing Preferences] from the displayed menu.

The fax driver screen is displayed.

The fax driver screen includes the following sheets.

  • [Edit Address Book] sheet
  • [Register Cover Sheet] sheet
  • [Special] sheet

  • To access the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes] folder), you need to be assigned full control permission for the printer. Full control access is available for users who are registered as Administrators or Power Users in the Windows system settings.
  1. Configure the required settings in the displayed fax driver screen.

For details about the fax driver settings, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.

  1. Click [OK].


Viewing the Online Help (PC Fax)

Return to Overview

To view the online help, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Display the fax driver screen.

See "Faxing a Document (PC Fax)" or "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand (PC Fax)" on how to display the fax driver screen.

  1. Click [Help].

The online help is displayed.



Attaching a Cover Sheet (PC Fax)

This section describes how to attach a cover sheet to the fax.


Remark
  • The number of recipients to which you can send simultaneously depends on how a cover sheet is attached. For details, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Display the [Sending Settings] sheet in the [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box.

See "Faxing a Document (PC Fax)" on how to display the fax driver screen.

  1. Select an option for attaching the cover sheet to the fax from [Cover Sheet Attachment].

Select one of the following options:

  • [None]
  • [Different Sheet to Each Recipient]
  • [Same Sheet to All Recipient]

  1. Select a cover sheet template from [Style].

  1. Click [Settings] to specify the items to include on the cover sheet.

If you do not specify the items to include on the cover sheet, proceed to step 12.

The [Item Settings] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select check boxes according to the information you want to print on the cover sheet in the [Sender] sheet → enter the information in the text boxes for the selected items.

You can specify the following items:

  • [Include Sender Name]
  • [Include Company]
  • [Include Dept./Div.]
  • [Include Fax Number]

  • You can save the information entered in the [Sender] sheet in a file by clicking [Save Sender]. Then, when you send a fax, you can import the information by using [Import Sender], instead of entering the sender information each time you send a fax.
  1. Select check boxes according to the information you want to print on the cover sheet in the [Recipient] sheet.

You can specify the following items:

  • [Include Recipient Name]
  • [Include Company]
  • [Include Dept./Div.]
  • [Include Fax Number]

  • The information of the recipients specified in the [Sending Settings] sheet prints on the cover sheet.
  1. Display the [Logo] or [Signature] sheet.

  1. Select [Print with Logo] or [Print with Signature] to include a logo or signature on the cover sheet.
  1. Click [Browse] to select a bitmap logo or signature file name for [File Name] → specify the magnification and position of the selected logo or signature.
  1. Select [Include Number of Sheets to Send] in the [Sheets to Send] sheet → enter the number of sheets you are going to send as a fax.

  • The number of sheets is not counted automatically. The number which you entered manually is shown on the cover sheet.
  1. Click [OK].

The [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select [Insert Attention Note] to insert an attention note → select a note from [Attention Note].

  • You can also enter the characters you want to insert. You can enter up to 30 characters.
  1. Enter any other information you want to include on the cover sheet in [Comment to include].

  1. Click [Preview] if you want to check the preview image on the cover sheet.

  1. Click [OK].

The specified cover sheet is attached to the fax when the fax is sent.



Using the Address Book (PC Fax)

This section describes how to use the address book, and includes the procedures for registering individual and group addresses, editing the address book, etc. You can also specify destinations from address books created in applications other than the fax driver.


Remark
  • You cannot access or edit the address book if you do not have access permission (default: Power Users or higher) to the destination folder of the address book. If this is the case, log on as user having access permission to the folder, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and specify a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, that you have write permission for as the destination folder of the address book. See "Changing the Address Book Export Destination (PC Fax)" for changing where you save the address book.

Single Person Entry (PC Fax)

Group Entry (PC Fax)

Importing Address Book Entries (PC Fax)

Exporting Address Book Entries (PC Fax)

Changing the Address Book Export Destination (PC Fax)


Single Person Entry (PC Fax)

Return to Overview

You can register addresses for individual people in the address book.


Remark
  • You can register up to 3000 address entries for individual people.
  • You cannot access or edit the address book if you do not have access permission (default: Power Users or higher) to the destination folder of the address book. If this is the case, log on as user having access permission to the folder, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and specify a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, that you have write permission for as the destination folder of the address book.
  • You can also edit previously registered single person addresses. For details, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand (PC Fax)" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Add Person].

The [Add Person] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Enter information about the new person such as their name and company name.

  1. Enter the fax number.
    You can also enter information concerning the fax number in [Description].

  • You can register two fax numbers: a primary number and a secondary number.
  1. Enter any additional information about the person in [Notes].

  1. Click [OK].

The settings are registered.

  • If you specify two fax numbers for a single individual destination, two fax numbers with the same name will be displayed in the address book.


Group Entry (PC Fax)

Return to Overview

You can register groups in the address book. As well as the addresses of individual people in a group, you can also register other registered groups as sub-groups.


Remark
  • You can register the group address up to 3000 entries.
  • You cannot access or edit the address book if you do not have access permission (default: Power Users or higher) to the destination folder of the address book. If this is the case, log on as user having access permission to the folder, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and specify a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, that you have write permission for as the destination folder of the address book.
  • You can also edit previously registered group destination information. For details, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand (PC Fax)" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Add Group].

The [Add Group] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Enter the new group name → select what to register from [Show].

Select what to register from among the following:

  • [Person]
  • [Group]
  • [All]

  1. Select person or group entries as members of the new group from the [Available Recipients] list → click [Add].

To remove a member of the selected group, select the person or group entry you want to remove from the [Current Group Members] list → click [Delete].

  • You can select multiple entries by holding down [SHIFT] or [CTRL] on the keyboard and clicking each entry that you want to select.
  1. Enter the keyword of the new group in [Notes].

  1. Click [OK].

The settings are registered.



Importing Address Book Entries (PC Fax)

Return to Overview

You can load data from CSV (*.csv) files or Canon Address Book files (*.abk) into the address book. If you load CSV format data, specify the character to be used as a separator.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand (PC Fax)" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Import].

The [Open] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select the file to import → click [Open].

Select the type of the file to import from [Files of type]: CSV Files (*.csv), Canon Address Book(*.abk), All Files(*.*)

The address book is imported, and added to the list.



Exporting Address Book Entries (PC Fax)

Return to Overview

You can save data registered in the address book as a CSV (*.csv) file or a Canon Address Book file (*.abk). If you save it in CSV format, specify the character to be used as a separator.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand (PC Fax)" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Export].

The [Save As] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Enter the file name → click [Save].

Select the type of the file to export from [Save as type]: CSV Files (*.csv) or Canon Address Book(*.abk)

The specified address book is saved as a file.



Changing the Address Book Export Destination (PC Fax)

Return to Overview

You can change the save destination of the address book of the fax driver (the Canon Fax Driver Address Book), or create a new address book.


Remark
  • You cannot access or edit the address book if you do not have access permission (default: Power Users or higher) to the destination folder of the address book. If this is the case, log on as user having access permission to the folder, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and specify a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, that you have write permission for as the destination folder of the address book.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand (PC Fax)" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Specify a Folder].

The [Browse for Folder] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select the folder to save the address book → click [OK].

  • Save the address book file in a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, where you have written permission.
  1. If you want to create an address book, click [New], or if you want to copy the existing address book to the specified folder, click [Copy].

  • If an address book already exists in the folder selected in step 3, the following message box will be displayed. If you want to use the existing address book, click [Use as-is], and if you want to use the address book of the fax driver, click [Overwrite].



Print

This category describes how to print from computers.



Introduction to Using Print Functions

Make sure that the printer driver is installed.

For installing the driver to send a print job to the machine over a network, see "Network Connection (MF4380dn/MF4370dn Only)."
For installing the driver to send a print job directly from your computer to the machine, see "USB Connection."


  • Printer Driver

Using the printer driver, the various data processing tasks conventionally executed within the printer are appropriately divided between the host computer and the printer to greatly reduce the overall printing time. The workload can be delegated to match the output data, thus realizing a significant increase in speed through optimization.
You can update your printer driver software and acquire information about Canon products on the Canon home page (http://www.usa.canon.com). Driver software is updated every few months.

  • XPS

The Canon XPS Printer Driver enables you to print documents in Windows Vista from applications that use the XPS format, utilizing the features and characteristics of the XPS format to the maximum extent.

When using the Canon XPS Printer Driver, make the setting from the machine as follows:
[Menu] → <SYSTEM SETTINGS> → <PDL SELECT(PnP)> → <UFRII(XPS)>
To enable the setting, turn OFF the main power switch and then turn ON.
How to use the Canon XPS Printer Driver, see the Readme file and Help.

  • The Canon XPS Printer Driver supports Windows Vista only. If you select <UFRII(XPS)> with other operating systems, the machine cannot detect your computer.
  • You cannot install the Canon XPS Printer Driver with the installer in the TCP/IP environment. How to install the Canon XPS Printer Driver, see the Readme file.
  • When using the Canon XPS Printer Driver, it is recommended to use Windows Vista Service Pack 1 for increasing the printing speed.

Remark
  • The available printer drivers may vary, depending on the machine and the version of Windows that you are using.

Printing through USB Connection

Printing through Network Connection

Where to Find Help


Printing through USB Connection

Return to Overview

To install the printer driver through a USB connection, see "USB Connection."


Remark
  • Before installing a printer driver through a USB connection, turn the printer OFF. Turn the power back ON only if the instruction to do so appears on the screen during installation.
  • In a USB environment, you cannot set up the printer configuration automatically or use the Job Accounting feature.


Printing through Network Connection

Return to Overview

To install the printer driver through network, see "Network Connection (MF4380dn/MF4370dn Only)."



Where to Find Help

Return to Overview

Here is where to get immediate help if you are having problems installing or using the printer driver.

  • README.TXT file

Any hints, enhancements, limitations, and restrictions you need to be aware of when installing and using your printer driver are included in the README.TXT file provided with the driver. The README.TXT file is located in the "DRIVERS" folder.

  • Online Help

You can locate additional help for questions you may have regarding your printer in the Online Help provided with the driver.



Printing Fundamentals

This section explains how to print a document and how to display the online help.


Remark
  • To use the printer, you need an appropriate printer driver.
  • Printing documents from a computer and scanning documents over the network cannot be processed at the same time. If this happens, these documents are handled differently depending on the following:
  • If you print PC documents when the machine is scanning documents, an error may occur. In this case, the machine scans documents first, then starts printing the PC documents when scanning is complete.
  • If you scan documents when the machine is printing PC documents, scanning is canceled. Wait for the PC documents to be printed out, then perform the scanning operation again.
  • For installing the driver to send a print job directly from your computer to the machine, see "USB Connection."

Printing with the Printer Driver

Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand

Viewing the Online Help


Printing with the Printer Driver

Return to Overview

The procedure for printing a document created in application software is as follows.


Remark
  • Printing methods may differ depending on the applications you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals provided with the application software.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Open the document you want to print from the application.
  1. Select [Print] from the [File] menu.

The printer driver screen is displayed.

  • The procedure to display the printer driver screen may differ depending on the applications you are using.
  1. Select your printer from [Select Printer], then click [Page Setup].

  • The printer name displayed in the printer driver screen is changed by settings in the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes]). See "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" to display the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes]).
  1. Configure the required settings in the printer driver screen.

See "Printing Functions " to find what you can configure in each sheet.

  1. Click [Print].

Printing begins.

If you want to cancel printing, see "Checking and Canceling Print Jobs."



Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand

Return to Overview

To configure the printing conditions, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • When printing, you can change the settings you configured beforehand. To change the settings, configure them from the application.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].

The [Printers] folder is displayed.

  • If you are using Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows Server 2008, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Devices and Printers] → [Printers and Faxes].
  1. In the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes] folder), right-click the icon of the printer whose settings you want to configure → click [Printing Preferences] from the displayed menu.

The printer driver screen is displayed.

  • To access the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes] folder), you need to be assigned full control permission for the printer. Full control access is available for users who are registered as Administrators or Power Users in the Windows system settings.
  1. Configure the required settings in the displayed printer driver screen.

See "Printing Functions" to find what you can configure in each sheet.

  1. Click [OK].

The printer whose settings you have configured will print with the same settings every time.



Viewing the Online Help

Return to Overview

To view the online help, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Display the printer driver screen.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Click [Help].

The online help is displayed.



Printing Functions

These sections explain what you can do in each sheet of the printer driver UI.


Remark
  • The items displayed in the printer driver window differ according to the printer model you are using.
  • Some functions may not be available depending on the printer model you are using.

Common Functions

Page Setup Sheet

Finishing Sheet

Quality Sheet


Common Functions

Return to Overview

The following functions are common to all sheets.


1

Selecting Profiles

You can select a profile to conveniently repeat the same print settings.

4

Preview

The settings configured in each sheet are displayed in the preview.

2

Adding/Editing Profiles

You can add and edit profile settings.

5

Verifying Settings

You can verify the settings specified in each sheet.

3

Changing the Output Method

You can change the output method, e.g. storing a document in an inbox.




Page Setup Sheet

Return to Overview

In the [Page Setup] sheet, you can configure the following settings. The numbers in the image at the bottom indicate where to configure the settings.


1

Output Paper Size

Enables you to select the paper size actually output from the printer.

4

Watermark

Prints pages with a watermark (such as "COPY") superimposed on the document.

2

Print Direction

Sets the print direction relative to the orientation of the paper.

5

Page Border

Prints each page with a border.

3

Page Layout

Prints multiple pages arranged on one sheet of paper.

6

Header/Footer

Prints pages with headers and/or footers with the date, page number, etc.




Finishing Sheet

Return to Overview

In the [Finishing] sheet, you can do the following.


1

2-sided Printing

Prints on the front and back of the paper.

3

Collating

When printing multiple sets of copies, outputs each set separately in page order.

2

Booklet Printing

Prints pages in a sequence that allows them to be folded and grouped into a booklet when output.

4

Grouping

When printing multiple sets of copies, outputs the pages in groups according to their page numbers.




Quality Sheet

Return to Overview

In the [Quality] sheet, you can do the following.


1

Grayscale Settings

Enables you to adjust the brightness and contrast.

3

Toner Reduction*

Prints with a reduced amount of toner.

2

Objective

Enables you to conveniently select the appropriate settings for the current content.



*See the following on "Toner Reduction":

  • When you set [On] or [Off] in [Toner Save] in the printer driver, the setting made from the printer driver will override <TONER SAVER MODE> in <COMMON SETTINGS> made from the machine.
  • When you set [Printer Default] in [Toner Save] in the printer driver, <TONER SAVER MODE> in <COMMON SETTINGS> made from the machine will override the setting made from the printer driver.


Scaling Documents

You can enlarge or reduce documents to match the output paper size, such as reducing a document created in LTR size to print on STMT, or enlarging a document created in STMT size to print on LTR.
There are two methods for scaling a document: select the output size of the document to scale it automatically, or specify the scaling value manually.


Remark
  • Depending on the selected page size and printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document.
  • Depending on the printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document to the optimum ratio for the selected page size.
  • If you are using an application that enables you to enlarge or reduce the document, configure the settings in the application.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select page size of the document you created in the application from [Page Size].

  1. Select output size of the document from [Output Size].

The document is scaled automatically according to the settings made in [Page Size] and [Output Size].

  1. If you want to increase or decrease the magnification manually, select [Manual Scaling] → specify the scaling ratio for [Scaling].

  • If the ratio is less than 25% or more than 200%, the document is printed without scaling on the paper specified in [Output Size].
  1. Click [OK].

If you display the [Page Setup] sheet according to "Printing with the Printer Driver", click [Print].



Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet

This mode enables you to reduce multiple pages to fit onto one sheet of paper. You can make well-organized documents by editing multiple materials onto one sheet. And you can cut down print costs by saving papers, and it is also useful for saving space.


Remark
  • Although there may be a function for printing multiple copies depending on the application you are using, do not used it together with this function. If you do, printing may not be executed correctly.
  • You cannot enlarge and reduce manually when using this function.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select the page layout from [Page Layout].

  1. Select the page order from [Page Order].

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  1. Click [OK].

If you display the [Page Setup] sheet according to "Printing with the Printer Driver", click [Print].



2-sided Printing

This mode enables you to make 2-sided printing. You can cut down print costs by half when copying in large quantities.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Display the [Finishing] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select [2-sided Printing] from [Print Style].

  1. Select binding edge for the paper printout from [Binding Location].

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  1. Click [OK].

If you display the [Page Setup] sheet according to "Printing with the Printer Driver", click [Print].



Booklet Printing

You can create a booklet by printing 2 pages on both sides of each sheet of paper.


Remark
  • You cannot specify the [Finishing] options in the [Finishing] sheet when performing Booklet Printing.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Display the [Finishing] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select [Booklet Printing] from [Print Style] → click [Booklet].

The [Detailed Settings for Booklet] dialog box opens.

  1. Specify the detailed settings such as [Booklet Printing Process], [Booklet Printing Method], and [Book Opening] → click [OK].

The [Finishing] sheet is displayed.

  • For details about the various settings in the [Detailed Settings for Booklet] dialog box, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the [Detailed Settings for Booklet] dialog box to view the online help.
  1. Click [OK] in the [Finishing] sheet.

If you display the [Page Setup] sheet according to "Printing with the Printer Driver", click [Print].



Poster Printing

You can enlarge a one-page image and print it over multiple pages. You can then glue the printed pages together to create a poster.


Remark
  • When outputting the pages face up, the print sequence for the pages (the sheets into which the image is divided) starts from the top left proceeds to the right. When outputting the pages face down, the sequence starts from the bottom right and proceeds to the left.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select page layout for poster from [Page Layout].

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  • If the options are not displayed for [Page Layout], display the [Device Settings] sheet, then select [Auto] or [Enabled] from [Spooling at Host].
  1. Click [OK].

If you display the [Page Setup] sheet according to "Printing with the Printer Driver", click [Print].



Watermark Printing

You can print a watermark (such as "CONFIDENTIAL" or "COPY") on a document created using an application. You can register the customized watermark other than the various predefined watermarks.


Remark
  • You can register up to 50 watermarks, not including the watermarks already provided.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select [Watermark] → select watermark for printing.

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  • By clicking [Edit Watermark], you can display the [Edit Watermark] dialog box, and create and register new watermarks based on previously registered ones. For details, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the [Edit Watermark] dialog box to view the online help.
  1. Click [OK].

If you display the [Page Setup] sheet according to "Printing with the Printer Driver", click [Print].



Viewing the Print Preview

You can display a preview and verify the print results prior to printing.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select [Edit and Preview] from [Output Method].

  1. Set the printing conditions in each of the sheets in the printer driver UI → click [Print].

See "Printing Functions" to find what you can configure in each sheet.

  1. Select the document you want to see a print preview of from [Document Name] → click the [Print Preview] button.

The print preview is displayed.

  • In the Canon PageComposer, not only you can display a print preview, but also merge and edit print jobs. For details, see the Canon PageComposer online help.


Selecting a Profile for Printing

Combinations of printer driver settings corresponding to a variety of printing purposes are provided with the printer driver as "profiles". This enables you to print documents according to a desired objective by simply selecting a profile from the [Profile] list.


Remark
  • You cannot access or edit the address book if you do not have access permission (default: Power Users or higher) to the destination folder of the address book. If this is the case, log on as user having access permission to the folder, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and specify a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, that you have write permission for as the destination folder of the address book.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select a profile from the [Profiles] list according to your objective.

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  1. Click [OK].

If you display the [Page Setup] sheet according to "Printing with the Printer Driver", click [Print].



Checking and Canceling Print Jobs

You can check the status of print jobs and cancel a job before the printing starts.


Remark
  • Make sure that the Processing/Data indicator is on or blinking. When the Processing/Data indicator is off, there are no jobs in the memory of the print job status.
  1. Press [Job Cancel/Status Monitor] repeatedly to select <PRINT STATUS> or <JOB CANCEL>, then press [OK].

If you select <JOB CANCEL>, press [] or [] to select <PRINT>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to scroll through the job list, and check the status of the print jobs.

If you want to cancel the job, go to the next step. Otherwise, press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.

  1. Press [] or [] to select the job you want to cancel, then press [OK].
  1. Press Press [] or [] to select <CANCEL>, then press [OK].

If you select <JOB CANCEL> in step 1, you do not need to perform this procedure. Go to the next step.

  1. Press [] to select <YES>.

If you do not want to cancel the job, press [] to select <NO>.

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Printer Settings from the Machine

This category describes the printer settings which you can specify from the machine.



ERROR TIME OUT

The <ERROR TIME OUT> setting enables the machine to discard a print job that remains in the machine's memory after a specified period of time.
This setting is useful when the data for the current job has some error and prevents the machine from performing further printing. In this case, the machine will not receive other print commands because it performs printing in the chronological order; the job received earlier is printed first, then the second job received printed next, etc.

If the ERROR TIME OUT setting is enabled, the current job will be discarded automatically in the specified period of time. For example, if <ERROR TIME OUT> is set to <ON> and <20 SEC>, the data for the current job will be erased from the machine's memory 20 seconds after the machine starts processing the data.

If <ERROR TIME OUT> is set to <OFF>, the machine will not discard jobs automatically.

The available setting range is from 1 to 300 seconds.
The default setting is <ON> and <15SEC>.


Remark
  • If this function is set so that a job will timeout, the machine may end a print job before all the data has been received if it takes a long time for the computer to send the data. If this occurs, adjust the length of the <ERROR TIME OUT> setting.
  • When a job is being processed, the Processing/Data indicator on the operation panel blinks green.
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [OK] to select <ERROR TIME OUT>.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the time, then press [OK].

You can also use [] or [] to enter the time.

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Scanning Documents to a Computer Connected with USB Cable

This category describes how to scan documents to your computer directly connected with a USB cable. Make sure that the scanner driver is installed. For instructions on how to install the software, see "USB Connection."



Overview of Scanner Functions

This machine enables you to scan documents to your computer.



System Requirements (Scan)

  • General
  • IBM or IBM-compatible PC
  • PC equipped with a USB port and the USB class driver installed
  • Windows 2000 Professional
  • CPU: Intel® Pentium® 133 MHz or higher (USB 1.1), Intel® Pentium® II or higher (USB 2.0)
  • Memory: 128 MB or more
  • Windows XP
  • CPU: Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® 300 MHz or higher (USB 1.1), Intel® Pentium® II or higher (USB 2.0)
  • Memory: 128 MB or more
  • Windows Vista
  • CPU: Intel® Pentium® 800 MHz or faster
  • Memory: 512 MB or more
  • Windows 7
  • CPU: 1 GHz (x86 processor, x64 processor) or faster
  • Memory: 1 GB (x86 processor), 2 GB (x64 processor) or more
  • The USB 2.0 Hi Speed connection requires a computer equipped with a CPU higher than Intel® Pentium® ll, more than 128 MB of RAM, and with Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows XP service pack released later than SP1 or Windows 2000 SP4 installed. If your computer meets all of these requirements and is preinstalled with USB 2.0 Host Controller, the USB 2.0 connection will be guaranteed.


Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a Computer

This section describes the basic procedure for scanning documents to your computer.


Remark
  • For better scanning quality, we recommend that you place documents on the platen glass. If you use the ADF, the scanned image might not be clear.

Scanning with [Start] on the Machine

Scanning with the MF Toolbox

Scanning an Image from an Application

Scanning with the WIA Driver (Windows XP/Vista/7 Only)

Scanning from the [Scanner and Camera Wizard] Dialog Box (Windows XP Only)


Scanning from the [Windows FAX & Scan] Dialog Box (Windows Vista/7 Only)


Scanning from Windows Photo Gallery (Windows Vista Only)


[New Scan] Dialog Box


Scanning from an Application (Windows XP/Vista/7 Only)


Advanced Properties



Scanning with [Start] on the Machine

Return to Overview

You can scan documents and transmit the scanned data to your computer using the operation panel of the machine.


Remark
  • Your machine must be connected via USB and the USB scanner driver must be loaded to scan.
  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [SCAN] repeatedly to select <USB SCANNING>.

For MF4350d, just press [SCAN] to display <SCANNING MODE>.

  1. Press [Start].
  • If you are asked to select a program to launch, select "MF Toolbox Ver4.9." The scanned document will be processed according to your settings.
  • When scanning is complete, a folder with the scanning date will be created in the [My Pictures] folder in the [My Documents] folder, and your document will be saved in this folder.(In Windows Vista, the folder will be created in the [Pictures] folder.)


Scanning with the MF Toolbox

Return to Overview

You can scan a document using the buttons on the MF Toolbox.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [SCAN] repeatedly to select <USB SCANNING>.

For MF4350d, just press [SCAN] to display <SCANNING MODE>.

  1. On the Windows desktop, double-click the [Canon MF Toolbox 4.9] icon to open the MF Toolbox.

You can also open the MF Toolbox by clicking [start] on the Windows task bar → [(All) Programs] → [Canon] → [MF Toolbox 4.9] → [Toolbox 4.9].

  1. Click one of the scanning buttons.
  • [Mail]: The document will be scanned and attached to an e-mail message in your e-mail application.
  • [OCR]: The text will be scanned and read by the OCR software.
  • [Save]: The document will be scanned and saved.
  • [PDF]: The text will be scanned and saved as a PDF file.
  • [Scan-1], [Scan-2], [Scan-3], [Scan-4]: The text will be scanned and appear in the registered application. You can change the button name by directly entering a new name (up to 8 characters long) over the button name.

A dialog box appears for each of the buttons.

Example: [Mail] dialog box

  1. Specify the required settings.
  • If you want to keep the same settings for future scans, click [Apply] before clicking [Start].
  • With [Scan-1], [Scan-2], [Scan-3] and [Scan-4] buttons, you can set the different settings for each. If you save the settings by clicking [Apply], the settings will be effective next time.
  1. Click [Start].

If you select [Display the Scanner Driver] in step 4, the [ScanGear MF] dialog box will appear.

  1. Specify the required settings.

For details, see "Setting Preferences and Scanning with ScanGear MF."

  1. Click [Scan].
  • When scanning is complete, a folder with the scanning date will be created in the [My Pictures] folder in the [My Documents] folder, and your document will be saved in this folder.(In Windows Vista/7, the folder will be created in the [Pictures] folder.)
  • If you have applications registered to the [Mail], [OCR], [PDF], [Scan-1], [Scan-2], [Scan-3] or [Scan-4] buttons, the scanned image will be displayed in the application or attached to an e-mail message after scanning. For details, see "External Application (E-mail Program)."
  • For some models, the CD-ROM provided with the machine contains the application Presto! PageManager which can be used with the MF Toolbox. Presto! PageManager will be registered in the [OCR] and [PDF] buttons of the MF Toolbox at the time of installation.
  • Presto! PageManager is not supported on Windows XP 64-bit version.


Scanning an Image from an Application

Return to Overview

You can scan an image from a TWAIN- or WIA- (Windows XP/Vista/7 Only) compliant application and use the image in that application. The following is an example of the procedure.

  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [SCAN] repeatedly to select <USB SCANNING>.

For MF4350d, just press [SCAN] to display <SCANNING MODE>.

  1. Open the application you want to use.
  1. Select the command to scan.
  1. Select the scanner driver to be used.

With Windows XP/Vista/7, you can use the ScanGear MF or the WIA driver as the scanner driver.

  1. Specify the scanner settings → click [Scan].

For details, see "Setting Preferences and Scanning with ScanGear MF," or "Scanning with the WIA Driver (Windows XP/Vista/7 Only)."



Scanning with the WIA Driver (Windows XP/Vista/7 Only)

Return to Overview

This section describes how to scan documents using the WIA driver.



Scanning from the [Scanner and Camera Wizard] Dialog Box (Windows XP Only)

Return to Overview

  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [SCAN] repeatedly to select <USB SCANNING>.

For MF4350d, just press [SCAN] to display <SCANNING MODE>.

  1. Open the [Scanners and Cameras] folder.

Click [start] on the Windows task bar → select [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Scanners and Cameras].

  1. Double-click the corresponding WIA driver icon.
  1. Click [Next >].
  1. Select a picture type.

You can select from [Color picture], [Grayscale picture], [Black and white picture or text], and [Custom].
When selecting [Custom], click [Custom settings] to make detailed settings in the [Properties] dialog box.

  1. Select the paper source.

You can select from [Flatbed] or [Document Feeder].

  1. Specify the scanned area.
  • If you have selected [Flatbed] as the paper source, click [Preview] → drag to specify the scanned area.
  • If you have selected [Document Feeder] as the paper source, select the page size from the drop-down list.
  1. Click [Next >].
  1. Specify a name, a file format, and the location for saving the group of pictures.

  • When you save more than one picture in the same location, sequential numbers are automatically added at the ends of file names.
  • You can select a file format from [BMP (Bitmap Image)], [JPG (JPEG Image)], [TIF (TIF Image)], and [PNG (PNG Image)].
  1. Click [Next >] to start scanning.

  1. Click [Next >].

If you want to publish these pictures to a Web site or order printouts online, select the corresponding option.

  1. Click [Finish].


Scanning from the [Windows FAX & Scan] Dialog Box (Windows Vista/7 Only)

Return to Overview

Depending on the edition of your Windows Vista/7, this function may not be supported.

  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [SCAN] repeatedly to select <USB SCANNING>.

For MF4350d, just press [SCAN] to display <SCANNING MODE>.

  1. Open the [Windows FAX & Scan] dialog box.

Windows Vista: Click [Start] on the Windows task bar → select [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Scan a document or picture] in [Scanners and Cameras].

Windows 7: Click [Start] on the task bar → [All Programs] → [Windows Fax and Scan].

  1. Click [New Scan] to open the [New Scan] dialog box.

You can open it also from the [File] menu by selecting [New] → [Scan].

  1. Make sure the corresponding scanner driver icon is displayed on [Scanner].

If you want to use other scanners, click [Change...] and select a desired scanner driver icon.

  1. Specify required scan settings.

For details on the settings, see "[New Scan] Dialog Box."

  1. Click [Scan].
  • It starts scanning. Scanned image displays on [Windows Fax & Scan].
  • When you scan more than one picture, sequential numbers are automatically added to the file names and the image files are saved in the [Scanned Documents] folder in the [Document] folder.
  • Renaming the image file is available afterward.


Scanning from Windows Photo Gallery (Windows Vista Only)

Return to Overview

  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [SCAN] repeatedly to select <USB SCANNING>.

For MF4350d, just press [SCAN] to display <SCANNING MODE>.

  1. Open the [Windows Photo Gallery].

Click [Start] on the Windows task bar → select [All programs] → [Windows Photo Gallery].

  1. Open the [Import Pictures and Videos] dialog box.

Select [Import from Camera or Scanner] from the [File] menu.

  1. Double-click the corresponding scanner driver icon.

Or select a corresponding scanner driver icon and press [Import]. The [New Scan] dialog box appears.

  1. Make sure the corresponding scanner driver is displayed on [Scanner].

If you want to use other scanners, click [Change...] and select a desired scanner driver icon.

  1. Specify required scan settings.

For details on the settings, see "[New Scan] Dialog Box."

  1. Click [Scan].

  • You can classify the scanned image by typing a tag in [Tag these pictures (optional):].
  • If you save the scanned image without typing the tag, it will be saved in a new folder created under the [pictures] folder, named by its scan date.
  1. Click [Import].
  • When you save more than one picture, sequential numbers are automatically added to the file names.
  • Renaming the image file is available afterward.


[New Scan] Dialog Box

Return to Overview

You can specify detailed settings for each scan.


[Scanner] The corresponding scanner driver is displayed. Click [Change...] to select a desired scanner driver icon.
[Profile] Selects the use for the scanned image from [Add profile...], [Documents], [Last used settings], and [Photo (Default)].
  • If you select [Last used settings], the settings previously used are recalled.
  • If you select [Add profile...], you can save new profiles from the [Add New Profile] dialog box.
  • To delete or edit added profiles, click [Delete] or [Edit] in the [Scan Profiles] dialog box in the [Scanners and Cameras] folder.
[Source] Selects from [Flatbed] (platen glass), [Feeder (Scan one side)], or [Feeder (Scan both sides)].
  • If you have selected [Flatbed] as the paper source, click [Preview] after unchecking [Preview or scan images as separate files] → drag to specify the scanned area. If you have selected [Feeder (Scan one side)] or [Feeder (Scan both sides)] as the paper source, select the page size from the [Paper size].
[Color format] Selects the scanning color type from [Color], [Grayscale], or [Black and white].
[File type] Selects a file format from [BMP (Bitmap Image)], [JPG (JPEG Image)], [PNG (PNG Image)], and [TIF (TIF Image)].
[Resolution (DPI)] Selects the scanning resolution in dot per inch (50 to 600).
[Brightness] Specifies the brightness (-100 to 100).
[Contrast] Specifies the contrast (-100 to 100) (only for color or grayscale scanning).


Scanning from an Application (Windows XP/Vista/7 Only)

Return to Overview

With the WIA driver dialog box open, follow the procedure below. On how to display the WIA driver, see "Scanning an Image from an Application."


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.

  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [SCAN] repeatedly to select <USB SCANNING>.

For MF4350d, just press [SCAN] to display <SCANNING MODE>.

  1. Select the paper source.

You can select from [Flatbed] or [Document Feeder].

  1. Select the picture type.

You can select from [Color picture], [Grayscale picture], [Black and white picture or text], and [Custom Settings].

  1. If necessary, click [Adjust the quality of the scanned picture].

The [Advanced Properties] dialog box appears.

  1. Adjust the quality of the image → click [OK].

For details on the settings, see "Advanced Properties."

  1. Specify the scanned area.
  • If you have selected [Flatbed] as the paper source, click [Preview] → drag to specify the scanned area.
  • If you have selected [Document Feeder] as the paper source, select the page size in [Page size].
  1. Click [Scan].


Advanced Properties

Return to Overview


[Appearance] Shows the preview of sample image.
[Brightness] Specifies the brightness (–127 to 127).
[Contrast] Specifies the contrast (–127 to 127) (only for color or grayscale scanning).
[Resolution (DPI)] Selects the scanning resolution in dot per inch (50 to 600).
[Picture type] Selects the scanning color type ([Color picture], [Grayscale picture], or [Black and white picture or text]).
[Reset] Resets all the current settings to their default values.
  • The setting items and default values in the [Advanced Properties] tab vary depending on the type of picture you select.


Setting the Scanning Function for [Start]

When you scan for the first time using [Start] on the machine, scanning will start in the same way as when you click [Save] in the MF Toolbox. By following procedure below you can change the set for scanning function on each of MF Toolbox or other applications when you press [start].


Setting up an application which has been registered to MF Toolbox

Setting up other applications which have not been registered to MF Toolbox


Setting up an application which has been registered to MF Toolbox

Return to Overview


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. On the Windows desktop, double-click the [Canon MF Toolbox 4.9] icon to open the MF Toolbox.

You can also open the MF Toolbox by clicking [start] on the Windows task bar → [(All) Programs] → [Canon] → [MF Toolbox 4.9] → [Toolbox 4.9].

  1. Drag the mark over the button you want to select.

  • The mark will be displayed above the button you select.

  • Also you can set it up in the following way.
    In the MF Toolbox, click [Settings] to open the [Settings] dialog box. From the drop-down list, select the scanning function you want to link [Start] to, then click [OK].



Setting up other applications which have not been registered to MF Toolbox

Return to Overview


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Open the [Scanners and Cameras] folder (Windows 2000: the [Scanners and Cameras Properties] dialog box).

Windows XP: Click [start] on the Windows task bar → select [Control Panel] → [Printers and other Hardware] → [Scanners and Cameras]. (Windows 7: Enter "scanner" in [Search programs and files] under [Start] on the Windows task bar → click [View scanners and cameras]. Windows Vista: [start] → [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Scanners and Cameras]. Windows 2000: [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → double-click [Scanners and Cameras].)

  1. Click the corresponding scanner driver icon.
  1. Select [Properties] from the [File] menu. (Windows 2000/Vista/7: Click [(Scan) Properties].)

  1. Specify an action for [Start].
  • On Windows XP/Vista/7:

Select the [Events] tab → select the option corresponding to your machine from [Select an event] → select the operation for [Start this program] in [Actions] → click [OK].

  • On Windows 2000:

Select the [Events] tab → select the option corresponding to your machine from [Scanner events] → select the operation for [Start] in [Send to this application] → click [OK].

  • If the settings you specified in the scanner property dialog box do not work immediately, disconnect and reconnect the USB cable, or restart your computer.


MF Toolbox Settings

This section describes the setting items you can specify on the MF Toolbox.

Example: [Mail] dialog box


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.

Scanner Settings

Save Scanned Image to

External Application (E-mail Program)

Confirmation of the Scanned Image and Exif Settings (Confirm the Scanned Image)

Exif Settings



Scanner Settings

Return to Overview

You can specify the scanning mode, resolution, document size, and file size of the scanned image.


[Select Source] Selects where the document is placed ([Platen Glass], [ADF], or [Auto Mode]).
  • When [Auto Mode] is selected, the document in the ADF is automatically scanned. If there is no document in the ADF, the document on the platen glass will be scanned.
[Input Method] (MF4380dn Only) Selects the document sides to be scanned ([1-sided] or [2-sided]).
[Paper Size] Selects the size of the document to be scanned. Selecting [Custom] opens the [Paper Size Settings] dialog box which enables you to set the custom paper size.
[Orientation] Opens the [Orientation] dialog box. This dialog box enables you to specify the orientation of the document.
This button is disabled when [Platen Glass] is selected in [Select Source].
(Original Orientation) Shows the direction of scanning paper. The icon display varies depending on the settings for [Select Source], [Paper Size], and [Orientation].
[Scan Mode] Selects the scan mode. The scan modes you can select differ depending on the MF Toolbox button you press.
[Black and White]:
Scans document as a black and white image.
[Black and White (OCR)]:
Scans document as a black and white image for OCR software.
[Grayscale]:
Scans document as a grayscale image (similar to a monochrome picture).
[Color]:
Scans document as a color image.
[Color (Magazine)]:
Scans document as a color image with the Descreen function, which enables you to reduce the moiré when scanning printed photographs and pictures.
[Upper Limit of Attached File] Selects an approximate upper size limit (after compression) for the image you will send. For an ordinary mail message, [150 KB] is recommended.
You can specify this item when scanning using the [Mail] button and [JPEG/Exif] is selected in [Save as Type].
[Image Quality] Selects the scan quality (resolution). When scanning using the [Mail] button, the resolution you can select depends on the setting in [Upper Limit of Attached File].
[Display the Scanner Driver] If you select this check box, all items in the [Scanner Settings] become invalid, and when [Start] is clicked the [ScanGear MF] dialog box appears and enables you to make advanced settings for scanning.
This check box is not available when scanning using the [OCR] button.


Save Scanned Image to

Return to Overview

You can specify the file name, file format, and location to save the scanned image. If you select PDF as a file format, you can also specify the detailed settings for the PDF file.


[File Name] Enter a file name for the scanned image. If you save another file with the same name, four digits starting from 0001 will be attached after the file name.
[Save as Type] Specifies the file type to save the scanned image.
[BMP]:
Bitmap format.
[JPEG/Exif]:
JPEG/Exif format. This option is available when [Grayscale], [Color] or [Color (Magazine)] is selected in [Scan Mode].
[TIFF]:
TIFF format.
[PDF]:
PDF format.
[PDF (Single Page)]:
Creates a single-page PDF file.
[PDF (Multiple Pages)]:
Creates one PDF file from two or more scanned pages (see "Creating One PDF File from Two or More Pages").
[PDF (Add Page)]:
Adds the scanned image to the last page of an existing PDF file that was created with the MF Toolbox.
  • The type of file which can be saved with each button is shown below.

  • When [PDF], [PDF (Single Page)], [PDF (Multiple Pages)], or [PDF (Add Page)] is selected and if an error message appears indicating that the image size is too large, reduce the data size of the scanned image. For details, see "Output Settings."
[PDF Settings] Opens the [PDF Settings] dialog box which enables you to make advanced settings of the PDF file (see "Creating One PDF File from Two or More Pages").
[Save Scanned Image to] Shows the location to save the scanned images. To change the location, click [Browse] → select a folder → click [OK].
[Add Scanned Image to] This item appears instead of [Save Scanned Image to] when [PDF (Add Page)] is selected in [Save as Type]. You can select the PDF file to which you want to add the scanned image.
[Save Pictures to a Subfolder with Current Date] Select this check box to create a folder with current date (e.g. 2007-12-31) in the specified location and save the scanned images in this folder.


External Application (E-mail Program)

Return to Overview

When scanning using the [OCR], [PDF], [Scan-1], [Scan-2], [Scan-3] or [Scan-4] buttons, you can specify an application to be used to display the scanned image. Click [Set] → select the application to use → click [Open]. You can also specify an application by dragging and dropping the application icon onto the dialog box.
When scanning using the [Mail] button, you can specify an e-mail software to which you want to attach the scanned image. The MF Toolbox is compatible with e-mail software such as Outlook Express, Microsoft Outlook, Microsoft Exchange, EUDORA, Netscape Messenger and Windows Mail (Windows Vista only). Click [Set] → select the application to use → click [OK].
If [None (Attach Manually)] is displayed, you need to attach the image file manually.



Confirmation of the Scanned Image and Exif Settings (Confirm the Scanned Image)

Return to Overview

You can preview the scanned images as thumbnail images, and specify the file type and location to save them.
Select [Confirmation of the Scanned Image and Exif Settings] (for the [PDF] button, [Confirm the Scanned Image]) → click [Start]. When the scanning is complete, the thumbnail of the scanned image is displayed. Confirm the thumbnail image → specify the file type and location → press [Save] or [Forward].


Remark
  • You cannot use this function when scanning with the [OCR] button.
  • For the [PDF] button, you can only confirm the scanned image and specify the location to save the image.

[Save as Type] Specifies the file type to save the scanned image. The available file types are the same as those listed in "Save Scanned Image to."
[Exif Settings] Opens the [Exif Settings] dialog box which enables you to set the Exif information when [JPEG/Exif] is selected in [Save as Type] (see "Exif Settings").
[PDF Settings] Opens the [PDF Settings] dialog box which enables you to make advanced settings of the PDF file (see "Creating One PDF File from Two or More Pages"). This button appears when [PDF], [PDF (Single Page)], [PDF (Multiple Pages)] or [PDF (Add Page)] is selected in [Save as Type].
[Save Scanned Image to] Specifies the location to save the scanned image.
[Add Scanned Image to] This item appears instead of [Save Scanned Image to] when [PDF (Add Page)] is selected in [Save as Type]. You can select the PDF file to which you want to add the scanned image.
[Save Pictures to a Subfolder with Current Date] Select this check box to create a folder with current date in the specified location and save the scanned images in this folder. This check box is not available when [PDF (Add Page)] is selected in [Save as Type].
[Save] Press to save the scanned images in the specified location.
[Forward] This button appears instead of [Save] when an application is specified in the [E-mail Program] or the [External Application] setting. You can forward the scanned images to the application.
[Cancel] Cancels the operation and returns to the previous window. Deletes all the images scanned in the operation.


Exif Settings

Return to Overview

You can attach extra information in the EXIF format, such as the description of the image, the date when the image was scanned, etc., to the JPEG files. Select a scanned image from the drop-down list to view and add information for the image.


[Basic Information] Displays the information automatically acquired by scanning.
[Advanced Information] Displays the extra information you enter.
[Apply the Same Setting of Input Items Automatically] Select this check box to use the same values you have specified in the previous scanning operation.


Creating One PDF File from Two or More Pages

You can scan two or more pages and make them into one PDF file.

  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [SCAN] repeatedly to select <USB SCANNING>.

For MF4350d, just press [SCAN] to display <SCANNING MODE>.

  1. Double-click the [Canon MF Toolbox 4.9] icon on the Windows desktop to open the MF Toolbox.

You can also open the MF Toolbox by clicking [start] on the Windows task bar → [(All) Programs] → [Canon] → [MF Toolbox 4.9] → [Toolbox 4.9].

  1. Click [PDF].
  1. Select [PDF (Multiple Pages)] in [Save as Type].
  1. Specify other required settings → click [PDF Settings].

The [PDF Settings] dialog box appears.

  1. Specify the required settings → click [OK].
  • [Create Searchable PDF]: Converts the characters in the document to text data and makes the PDF document searchable with keywords.
  • [Text Language]: Select the language of the text to be scanned. The characters may be recognized more accurately if you select [English] from this drop-down list and set [Image Quality] to [300 dpi] or higher in [Scanner Settings].
  • [PDF Compression]: Select [High] for color images such as photos or illustrations to be further compressed, reducing the file size.
  1. Click [Start].
  • When you set the document on the platen glass, the following dialog box appears as each page is scanned.

  • To continue to scan, place the next page and click [Next]. When scanning is complete, click [Finish].


Setting Preferences and Scanning with ScanGear MF

The ScanGear MF enables you to preview the image to be scanned and make detailed adjustments for the image. To use the ScanGear MF, select [Display the Scanner Driver] in the MF Toolbox, or scan from an application.


Remark
  • You cannot preview the image when using the ADF.

Switching between Simple Mode and Advanced Mode

Using Simple Mode

Add/Delete the Output Size


Simple Mode Toolbar


Using Advanced Mode

Advanced Mode Toolbar


Specifying the Parameters of a Scan

Selecting the Cropping Area Automatically


Creating a Cropping Frame


Creating Multiple Cropping Frames (Only when Using the Platen Glass)


Deleting Cropping Frames


Advanced Mode Settings

Favorite Settings


Input Settings


Output Settings


Image Settings


Color Settings


[Preferences] Dialog Box


Determining Resolution


Switching between Simple Mode and Advanced Mode

Return to Overview

The ScanGear MF has two modes: [Simple Mode] and [Advanced Mode]. With [Advanced Mode] you can perform detailed settings such as resolution and contrast.
To switch between two modes, click the corresponding tab.



Using Simple Mode

Return to Overview

  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [SCAN] repeatedly to select <USB SCANNING>.

For MF4350d, just press [SCAN] to display <SCANNING MODE>.

  1. Select the document type in [Select Source].
  • [Photo (Color)]: To scan color photos.
  • [Magazine (Color)]: To scan color magazines with the Descreen function.
  • [Newspaper (B&W)]: To scan text and line drawings.
  • [Document (Grayscale)]: To scan color images or text in monochrome. Appropriate for scanning high-resolution monochrome images.
  • [Document (Color) ADF]: To scan color documents on the ADF.
  • [Document (Grayscale) ADF]: To scan Grayscale documents on the ADF.
  • If you select [Document (Color) ADF] or [Document (Grayscale) ADF], skip to step 5.
  • On how to turn off the automatic color correction for the document type other than [Newspaper (B&W)], see "[Preferences] Dialog Box."
  1. Click [Preview].

A preview of the scanned image appears in the preview window.

  1. Select the use for the scanned image in [Select Purpose].

You can select from [Print (300 dpi)], [Image display (150 dpi)], or [OCR (300 dpi)], depending on the document type you selected in step 3. For details, see "Determining Resolution."

  1. Select the output size of the scanned image in [Output Size].
  • The options you can select vary depending on what you selected in step 5.
  • Click to switch the orientation of the output size (landscape or portrait).
  1. Adjust the cropping frame and select the [Fading Correction] check box as needed.

To adjust the cropping frame, click (Auto Crop) or drag the corner or edge of the frame. For details, see "Specifying the Parameters of a Scan."

  • The [Fading Correction] check box can be selected only when scanning color documents.
  • When the preview image is not displayed, the [Fading Correction] check box is disabled.
  1. Click [Scan].


Add/Delete the Output Size

Return to Overview

Selecting [Add/Delete] for [Output Size] opens the [Add/Delete the Output Size] dialog box. This dialog box enables you to add and delete the custom output size.


[Purpose] Selects the use for the scanned image from [Print] or [Image Display]. This setting is available with [Advanced Mode] only.
[Output Size Name] Specifies the output size name you want to register.
[Width] Specifies the width of the output size.
[Height] Specifies the height of the output size.
[Unit] Selects the unit of measurement for the output size.
[Add] Adds the specified output size to the [Output Size List].
[Delete] Deletes the selected output size from the [Output Size List].
[Save] Saves added or deleted output sizes.


Simple Mode Toolbar

Return to Overview


(Auto Crop) Crops the image automatically. For details, see "Specifying the Parameters of a Scan."
(Remove Cropping Frame) Removes the selected cropping frames.
(Left Rotate) Rotates the image 90 degrees left.
(Right Rotate) Rotates the image 90 degrees right.
(Information) Lists the scanning information.


Using Advanced Mode

Return to Overview

  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [SCAN] repeatedly to select <USB SCANNING>.

For MF4350d, just press [SCAN] to display <SCANNING MODE>.

  1. Select settings for [Favorite Settings], [Input Settings], [Output Settings] and [Image Settings], and adjust the color settings.
  • If you select [ADF (1-sided)] or [ADF (2-sided)]* in [Original Input Method], skip to step 5.

*MF4380dn Only

  1. Click [Preview].
  • Selecting the range in the preview window and clicking [Zoom] reloads the selected image to be enlarged.
  • To delete the displayed preview image, click .
  1. If you want to scan only part of the document, specify the parameters.

For details, see "Specifying the Parameters of a Scan."

  1. Click [Scan].


Advanced Mode Toolbar

Return to Overview


(Clear) Deletes the preview image from the preview area. It also resets the toolbar settings and color settings.
(Crop) Specifies the parameter of a scan.
(Move) Moves the enlarged image on the screen.
(Zoom) Enlarges or reduces the preview image. Click on the image to zoom in, and right-click on the image to zoom out.
(Left Rotate) Rotates the image 90 degrees left.
(Right Rotate) Rotates the image 90 degrees right.
(Information) Lists the scanning information.
(Auto Crop) Crops the image automatically. For details, see "Specifying the Parameters of a Scan."
(Remove Cropping Frame) Removes the selected cropping frames.
[Select All Crops] When this button is used, all the cropping frames reflect the settings made on the [Advanced Mode] tab sheet.
[Zoom] Click this button to rescan the focal cropping area of the preview image at a higher level of magnification.
Once clicked, this button changes into [Undo]. The image retunes to its original size by clicking [Undo].


Specifying the Parameters of a Scan

Return to Overview

You can create scan areas (cropping areas) for images shown in the preview area. When you click [Scan], only the cropped area will be scanned.



Selecting the Cropping Area Automatically

Return to Overview

After previewing, click (Auto Crop) on the toolbar. Clicking this button enables you to gradually crop off the image outside the borders detected in the preview image.



Creating a Cropping Frame

Return to Overview

Select (Crop) on the toolbar, click on the preview image and drag over the area you wish to select. To make further adjustments, drag the corner or edge of the selected frame or enter the desired parameter values for (Width) and (Height) in [Input Settings] on the [Advanced Mode] tab sheet. To move the cropping frame you have selected, click inside the cropping frame and drag.


Remark
  • To maintain the current width and height proportion of the image, click in [Input Settings].
  • When using the ADF, creating a new cropping frame will erase an existing one.


Creating Multiple Cropping Frames (Only when Using the Platen Glass)

Return to Overview

You can create another cropping frame even if there is already one in the preview area. Click and drag the mouse cursor outside the existing cropping frame to create a new cropping frame in that area.
You can create up to 10 cropping areas. By clicking [Scan] once, all the cropped areas will be scanned. (Scanning will continue until all selected areas have been scanned.)
The most recently created cropping frame will become the focal point. To make adjustments to previously created cropping frames, select the frame or frames by clicking on them.



Deleting Cropping Frames

Return to Overview

If you want to remove cropping frames, select the frame or frames and do one of the following:

  • Click [Delete] on the keyboard.
  • Click (Remove Cropping Frame) on the toolbar.
  • Right-click on the cropped area and select [Delete].
  • Hold down [Ctrl] on the keyboard, right-click outside the cropped area, and select [Delete].


Advanced Mode Settings

Return to Overview



Favorite Settings

Return to Overview

Favorite Settings enables you to save a set of settings (Input Settings, Output Settings, Image Settings, Color Settings and Preferences) made for the focal cropping frame. If there are no cropping frames, settings for the whole preview area are saved.
You can also recall the saved settings and apply them to the selected frames or the whole preview area.

  • The following items cannot be saved in Favorite Settings:
  • Values of (Width) and (Height) in [Input Settings] and in [Output Settings]
  • Activation of (maintaining the proportion of width and height) in [Input Settings]
  • Value of [%] (Scale) in [Output Settings]

[User Defined] When this option is selected, specify a value for each setting.
[Default] Restores the default settings. The preview image will be cleared.
[Add/Delete] Opens the [Add/Delete Favorite Settings] dialog box. This dialog box enables you to name and register a set of settings for the current preview image.
[Add/Delete] is not displayed when there is no preview image.


Input Settings

Return to Overview


[Original Input Method] Selects where the document is placed from [Platen Glass], [ADF (1-sided)], or [ADF (2-sided)]*.
*MF4380dn Only
  • If you change this setting after previewing, the preview image will be deleted.
[Input Size] Selects the size of the original document.
  • If you change this setting after previewing, the preview image will be deleted.
  • When the document is loaded in the ADF, select the paper size from [A5 Portrait], [A5 Landscape], [A4], [Letter] and [Legal].
(Original Orientation) Shows the direction of the document being scanned. The icon display varies depending on the settings for [Original Input Method], [Input Size], and [Orientation].
[Orientation] Opens the [Orientation] dialog box. This dialog box enables you to specify the orientation of the original document.
(Width) Specifies the width of the input size.
(Height) Specifies the height of the input size.
  • Some applications have a limit to the amount of image data they can receive. If the parameters of a scan contain more than 21,000 x 30,000 pixels, the image will not be received.
  • When [Output Resolution] is set to [600] dpi, minimum parameters of an image are 96 x 96 pixels.
  • To maintain the current width and height proportions of the image, click .
[Color Mode] Selects the type of document and the way in which it is scanned.
[Black and White]:
To output documents to a monochrome printer. The contrast in the image is divided at certain levels (threshold values) into black and white and is displayed in two colors. For the threshold setting, see "Color Settings."
[Grayscale]:
To scan black and white photos or monochrome images. The image is expressed in a 0-255 scale of black and white.
[Color]:
To scan color photos. The image is expressed in 256 levels (8 bit) of R(ed), G(reen) and B(lue).
[Color (Documents)]:
To scan color documents that include texts or charts in addition to color photos. The image is expressed in 256 levels (8 bit) of R(ed), G(reen) and B(lue).
[Text Enhanced]:
To scan texts crisply, particularly to process it with OCR software. The image is displayed in black and white.


Output Settings

Return to Overview


[Output Resolution] Specifies the resolution for the scan. You can select a resolution from the drop-down list, or enter any value between 25-9600 dpi. If you are using the ADF, enter a resolution between 25-600 dpi. For details, see "Determining Resolution."
[Output Size] Selects the output size of the scanned image. If you select [Add/Delete], the [Add/Delete the Output Size] dialog box will appear and you can add and delete the custom output size. (See "Add/Delete the Output Size.")
If [Flexible] is selected, enter values in (Width), (Height) or [%] (Scale). The resolution when you actually scan will change in accordance with the value of [%]. The ratio of (Width) and (Height) is linked to (Width) and (Height) in [Input Settings]. You can enter the value for [%] between 25 and 38400, but the upper limit varies depending on the value of [Output Resolution].
Click to switch the orientation of the output size (landscape or portrait). This button is invalid when [Flexible] is selected.
[Data Size] Shows the data size of the scanned image according to your settings.


Image Settings

Return to Overview


[Auto Tone] Set to [ON] to automatically adjust the tone of the image. You can apply this setting when the preview image is displayed.
  • This setting is available when [Color], [Color (Documents)] or [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode], and [Color Correction] is set to [Recommended] or [Color Matching] in the [Preferences] dialog box. (See "[Preferences] Dialog Box.")
[Unsharp Mask] Set to [ON] to emphasize the outline of an image and make it sharper. It is effective for scanning photos etc., which have a soft focus.
  • This setting is available when [Color], [Color (Documents)] or [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode].
[Descreen] Set to [ON] to reduce the distorted pattern (moiré) when scanning printed photographs and pictures.
  • This setting is available when [Color], [Color (Documents)] or [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode].
  • Even if [Descreen] is set to [ON], some moiré effect may remain if [Unsharp Mask] is also set to [ON]. In this case, disable [Unsharp Mask].
  • A change in this setting is reflected after [Scan] is clicked.
[Reduce Dust and Scratches] Reduces the dust and scratches on photos.
[None]:
No reduction of dust and scratches will be made.
[Low]:
Reduces only small dust and scratch marks.
[Medium]:
Normally this setting is recommended.
[High]:
Reduces large dust and scratch marks. This may remove delicate parts of the image.
  • This setting is available when [Color], [Color (Documents)] or [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode].
[Fading Correction] Rebuilds the color quality that has faded over time. It also increases saturation of dullcolored documents to reproduce a vivid image. You can apply this setting when the preview image is displayed.
[None]:
No fading correction will be made.
[Low]:
Corrects slightly faded images.
[Medium]:
Normally this setting is recommended.
[High]:
Corrects highly faded images. This may change the tone of the image.
  • This setting is available when [Color] or [Color (Documents)] is selected in [Color Mode], and [Color Correction] is set to [Recommended] in the [Preferences] dialog box. (See "[Preferences] Dialog Box.")
[Grain Correction] Smoothes out the film grain of the image recorded on fast film. The result is smoother tones and higher overall quality.
[None]:
No grain correction will be made.
[Low]:
Select this setting when the grain in the picture is not so notable.
[Medium]:
Normally this setting is recommended.
[High]:
Smoothes out even very notable grain in the picture. This may lower the image sharpness and tonal quality.
  • This setting is available when [Color], [Color (Documents)] or [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode].
  • This setting is not reflected in the preview image.


Color Settings

Return to Overview

Using Color Settings buttons, you can adjust the brightness and contrast of the whole image, specify highlights and shadows, and adjust the contrast and balance in an image.
The buttons displayed differ depending on your selection in [Color Mode]. When [Text Enhanced] is selected, no Color Settings button is displayed.
When [Color], [Color (Documents)] or [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode]:

When [Black and White] is selected in [Color Mode]:

By selecting [Add/Delete] from the drop-down list, you can name and save a set of color settings. For details, see "Tone Curve/Threshold Drop-Down List."
Clicking a button opens the dialog box for each color setting. If [Reset] is clicked, all color settings will be reset to the default values.

  • Brightness/Contrast

This dialog box enables you to adjust the levels of brightness and contrast of the image. Click to adjust the brightness and contrast diagrammatically.


[Channel] Select a color to adjust either [Red], [Green], or [Blue], or select [Master] to adjust all three colors together when [Color] or [Color (Documents)] is selected in [Color Mode]. Adjust the elements of grayscale when [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode].
[Brightness] Adjust the brightness of the image by moving the slider or entering values (–127 to 127).
[Contrast] Adjust the contrast of the image by moving the slider or entering values (–127 to 127).
[Reset] Resets all the current settings to their default values.

  • Histogram

This dialog box enables you to see the data concentration at each brightness level in an image. You can specify the darkest and brightest levels within an image, cut the levels and expand the middle of the tonal range of the image.


[Channel] Select a color to adjust either [Red], [Green], or [Blue], or select [Master] to adjust all three colors together when [Color] or [Color (Documents)] is selected in [Color Mode]. Adjust the elements of grayscale when [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode].
(Black-point eyedropper tool) Click this button, then click a point in the preview image (or inside the focal crop) to specify the darkest point. You can also enter a value (0 to 245) or move the slider to an appropriate level.
1 (Mid-point eyedropper tool) Click this button, then click a point in the preview image (or inside the focal crop) to specify the midtone point. You can also enter a value (5 to 250) or move the slider to an appropriate level.
(White-point eyedropper tool) Click this button, then click a point in the preview image (or inside the focal crop) to specify the highlighted point. You can also enter a value (10 to 255) or move the slider to an appropriate level.
(Gray Balance eyedropper tool) When adjusting a color image, click this button, then click a point in the preview image (or inside the focal crop) to specify the point to execute gray balance adjustment. The gray elements within a scanned image will appear as a neutral gray, and other elements within the image will also have true color reproduction.
[Reset] Resets all the current settings to their default values.

  • Tone Curve Settings

This dialog box enables you to adjust the brightness of a specific area of an image by selecting the type of the tone curve. The tone curve is a graph showing the balance of tone input and output.


[Channel] Select a color to adjust either [Red], [Green], or [Blue], or select [Master] to adjust all three colors together when [Color] or [Color (Documents)] is selected in [Color Mode]. Adjust the elements of grayscale when [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode].
[Select Tone Curve] Select the tone curve from [No Correction], [Over Exposure], [Under Exposure], [High Contrast] or [Invert the Negative/Positive Image].
[Reset] Resets all the current settings to their default values.

  • Final Review

This dialog box enables you to confirm the color settings.

  • Threshold

This dialog box enables you to adjust the threshold. By adjusting the threshold, you can sharpen characters in a text document and reduce back-printing such as in newspapers.


[Threshold Level] Adjust the threshold by moving the slider or entering a value (0 to 255).
[Reset] Resets the current setting to the default value.
  • The brightness of color and grayscale images are expressed as a value between 0 and 255 but the brightness of black and white images is expressed in terms of either black or white, including the parts of an image which are a color between the two. The boundary at which black and white is divided is called "threshold".

This drop-down list enables you to save a set of color settings made for the focal cropping frame. If there are no cropping frames, settings for the whole preview area are saved.
You can also recall the saved settings and apply them to the selected frames or the whole preview area.


[Custom] When this option is selected, specify a value for each color setting. Even after the registered settings are applied, [Custom] resumes automatically if you change any setting or make adjustments to the selected cropping frame.
[Add/Delete] Opens the [Add/Delete Tone Curve Settings] dialog box ([Add/Delete Threshold Settings] dialog box, when [Black and White] is selected in [Color Mode]). This dialog box enables you to name and register a set of color settings.


[Preferences] Dialog Box

Return to Overview

Clicking [Preferences] on the [Advanced Mode] tab sheet opens the [Preferences] dialog box. This dialog box enables you to adjust settings for scanning and previewing.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.

  • [Preview] Tab


[Preview at the Start of ScanGear] Selects the preview operation when you open the ScanGear MF.
[Automatically Execute Preview]:
The preview scan starts automatically when you open the ScanGear MF.
[Display Saved Preview Image]:
Displays the image last previewed.
[None]:
Nothing is displayed.
[Cropping Frame on Previewed Images] Sets how the cropping frame is displayed when you preview images.
[Execute Auto Cropping on Previewed Images]:
The image will be automatically cropped to match the document size.
[Display the Last Frame on Previewed Images]:
Displays the last frame.
[None]:
No frame will be displayed.

  • [Scan] Tab


[Scan without Using ScanGear's Window] Enables you to scan in a specific color mode when using an application that will not display the [ScanGear MF] dialog box (such as OCR software), overriding the application settings.
[Color Mode (Text and Table)]:
The document is scanned in a mode equivalent to [Color (Documents)] of [Color Mode], regardless of the application settings.
[Text Enhanced]:
The document is scanned in a mode equivalent to [Text Enhanced] of [Color Mode], regardless of the application settings.
[Automatically Quit ScanGear after Scanning] If selected, the [ScanGear MF] dialog box quits automatically after the image is scanned.
Some applications will automatically quit ScanGear MF after scanning irrespective of this setting.

  • [Color Settings] Tab


[Color Correction] Selects the type of color correction.
[Recommended]:
Vividly reproduces the tone of a document on the screen.
[Color Matching]:
Select to automatically match the scanner, monitor and color printer colors. If selected, the Color Settings buttons are invalid in the [Advanced Mode] tab sheet. This setting is available when [Color] or [Color (Documents)] is selected in [Color Mode].
[None]:
No color matching is made. This setting is available when [Color], [Color (Documents)] or [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode].
[Always Execute the Auto Tone] If selected, the image color will always be automatically corrected. This setting is available when [Color], [Color (Documents)] or [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode].
[Monitor Gamma] Enables you to perform gamma correction. Specify the gamma value (0.10 to 10.00) of the monitor for viewing the scanned image. This setting is not reflected in the scanning result when [Black and White] is selected in [Color Mode].
  • [Monitor Gamma] value will be fixed to 1.80 when [Color Matching] is selected in [Color Correction].

  • [Scanner] Tab


[Select Folder Where Temporary Files are Saved] Click [Browse] and specify the folder in which the files are saved.
[Sound Settings] Sets the scanner to play music during scanning or play a sound when scanning is complete.
You can specify the following files: MIDI files (*.mid, *.rmi, *.midi), Audio files (*.wav, *.aiff, *.aif), MP3 file (*.mp3).
[Play Music During Scanning]:
If selected, the scanner plays music during scanning. Click [Browse], then specify a sound file.
[Play Sound When Scanning is Completed]:
If selected, the scanner plays sound when scanning is complete. Click [Browse], then specify a sound file.
[Test Scanner] Opens the [Scanner Diagnostics] dialog box, which enables you to confirm normal operation of the scanner. Check that the power cord is plugged in, and the USB cable is connected between the machine and your computer, then click [Start].


Determining Resolution

Return to Overview

The data in the image you scan is a collection of dots carrying information about brightness and color. The density of these dots is called "resolution" and "dpi" (dots per inch) refers to the number of dots in one inch.
You can specify a resolution in [Image Quality] in the MF Toolbox settings dialog box, or in [Output Resolution] in the ScanGear MF.

  • Images for Display on a Monitor

Images for display on a monitor in general should be scanned at a resolution of 75 dpi.

  • Images for Printing

Images to be printed should be scanned at a resolution which corresponds to the resolution of the printer.

  • With a color printer, the colors are expressed as a certain percentage of ink pigment so scanning your document at half the resolution of the printer should be fine.
  • Printing Scale

For example, if you want to print a document which is twice the original size both vertically and horizontally, the resolution of your document will be reduced by half. In such a case, scan the original document at double the resolution so that you can print the document with sufficient quality, even if you double the size of the document. Conversely, if you want to print a document at a reduced size, it should be sufficient to scan at half the resolution.

  • Resolution and Data Size

If you double the resolution, the image data will be four times greater. If the data is too large, processing speed will slow down significantly, and you may experience malfunctions such as lack of memory. Make sure the resolution corresponds to the planned use of the image and set it at the lowest level possible.



Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer (MF4380dn/MF4370dn Only)

This category describes how to scan from computers.



Overview of Scanner Functions

This machine enables you to scan documents from computers over the network. Scanned documents are transmitted over the network to your computer.



Introduction to Using Scanner Functions – Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer

This section describes the things that you must do before scanning documents from a networked computer.
Make sure to set the following items first:


Remark
  • Some functions of the setting items in the [Main] page of Color Network ScanGear are unavailable. Unavailable functions are as shown below:
  • [Color Mode]: Not compatible with [Grayscale] nor [Auto-color Select].
  • [Resolution]: Click the drop-down list and select the resolution (75-300). You cannot directly enter and set any number other than the selectable items.
  • [Original Size]: Not compatible with [Custom].
  • [Pages to Scan]/[Image Qlty Adjstmnt]: You cannot set these items.
  • [Density Adjustment]: Not compatible with [Auto].

  • Network settings

Set the network settings to enable your machine to communicate over the network. (See "Basic Network Settings.")


  • Color Network ScanGear

Install the Color Network ScanGear scanner driver for using the machine as a scanner. (See "Set Up Computers and Software.")



Basic Methods for Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer

This section describes the basic procedure for using Color Network ScanGear to scan over the network.


Remark
  • For better scanning quality, we recommend that you place documents on the platen glass. If you use the ADF, the scanned image might not be clear.
  • Printing fax documents and scanning documents over the network cannot be processed at the same time. If this happens, these documents are handled differently depending on the following:
  • If you scan documents when the machine is receiving fax documents, or the machine receives fax documents when scanning documents, the machine scans documents first, then starts printing the fax documents when scanning is complete.
  • If you scan documents when the machine is printing received fax documents, scanning is canceled. Wait for the fax documents to be printed out, then perform the scanning operation again.
  • Sending documents from a computer and scanning documents over the network cannot be processed at the same time. If this happens, these documents are handled differently depending on the following:
  • If you send PC documents when the machine is scanning documents, the machine scans documents first, then starts sending the PC documents when scanning is complete.
  • If you scan documents when the machine is sending PC documents, scanning is canceled. Wait for the PC documents to be sent out, then perform the scanning operation again.
  • Printing documents from a computer and scanning documents over the network cannot be processed at the same time. If this happens, these documents are handled differently depending on the following:
  • If you print PC documents when the machine is scanning documents, an error may occur. In this case, the machine scans documents first, then starts printing the PC documents when scanning is complete.
  • If you scan documents when the machine is printing PC documents, scanning is canceled. Wait for the PC documents to be printed out, then perform the scanning operation again.
  1. Place documents.
  1. Press [SCAN] repeatedly to select <NETWORK SCANNING>.
  1. Start Color Network ScanGear from the application on your computer.

For details, see "Starting Color Network ScanGear (Network Scan)."

  1. Make scan settings on the [Main], [Options], and [Scanner Info] sheets.

For details about the settings in each sheet, refer to the Online Help for that sheet.

  1. Click [Scan].

Scanning starts. When scanning is complete, the Color Network ScanGear Main Window closes and the scanned image is transferred to the application. During scanning, a scanning progress dialog box is displayed. To interrupt scanning, click [Cancel].



Selecting the Network Scanner to be Used (Network Scan)

Selecting the network scanner to be used with the ScanGear Tool enables scanning with the Color Network ScanGear driver. No scanner is selected during the Network ScanGear installation, so this operation is required before use.


Remark
  • The ScanGear Tool cannot be started at the same time as the Color Network ScanGear driver.
  1. On the [Start] (or ) menu, point to [Programs] (or [All Programs]) → [Color Network ScanGear] → click [ScanGear Tool].

The ScanGear Tool starts.

  1. Select the scanner to be used.


  • 1. Click [Discover].

The ScanGear Tool searches for scanners on the network, and the results are displayed in the list.


  • 2. Click the scanner to be used in the list → click [Select].

Information for the selected scanner appears under [Selected Scanner].

  • Only scanners on the same subnet (network with the same network ID) as your computer are displayed in the list.
  • After selecting the scanner, you can click [Test Connection] to check that the selected scanner can be used.


  • 1. Click [IP Address].

The [IP Address] dialog box appears.


  • 2. Enter the IP address in [Scanner IP Address] → click [OK].

Information for the selected scanner appears under [Selected Scanner].

  • It is possible to specify an IP address outside the subnet.
  • After selecting the scanner, you can click [Test Connection] to check that the selected scanner can be used.
  1. Click [Exit].

The settings are saved and the ScanGear Tool is closed.



Starting Color Network ScanGear (Network Scan)

The Color Network ScanGear driver is started by accessing it from a TWAIN-compliant application as follows.


Remark
  • The Color Network ScanGear driver cannot be started at the same time as the ScanGear Tool. If the ScanGear Tool is running, close it.
  1. Start the application.
  1. In the application, select Color Network ScanGear as the scanner to be used.

In the application, select the command for scanner selection (for example, "Select Scanner", or "Select Source") → select [Color Network ScanGear] in the dialog box that is displayed.

Repeating this operation is unnecessary - it only needs to be performed once.

  1. In the application, select the command to start the scanning operation (for example, [Scan New] or [Acquire]).

The Color Network ScanGear main window appears.

  • See the documentation provided with your application for commands and procedures used to select Color Network ScanGear and start scanning.


Color Network ScanGear Main Window (Network Scan)

The window that appears when the Color Network ScanGear driver is opened in an application is called the Color Network ScanGear Main Window. The Color Network ScanGear Main Window includes the following items.



Toolbar (Network Scan)

Scanning Buttons (Network Scan)

Preview Area (Network Scan)

Settings (Network Scan)

Status Bar (Network Scan)


Toolbar (Network Scan)

Return to Overview

The toolbar contains buttons for manipulating the image shown in the Preview Area. You can reposition the toolbar by clicking and dragging it. You can hide the toolbar by clicking (Exit), to remove it from the display. To redisplay it, select [Show Toolbar] on the [System] menu in the main window. The functions of the buttons in the toolbar are described below.


  • (Crop)

Clicking this button turns the pointer into a cross-hair, which you can then drag within the Preview Area to specify the area to be scanned.

  • (Move Image)

Clicking this button turns the pointer into a small hand, which you can then drag to scroll the image in the Preview Area. The Move Image button is available only when the image has been zoomed, so that it is larger than the Preview Area.

  • (Zoom)

Clicking this button turns the pointer into a magnifying glass in the Preview Area, allowing you to enlarge or reduce the image in the Preview Area. Click the left mouse button on the preview image to enlarge it by one step, and click the right mouse button on the enlarged image to reduce it by one step. This button is available only when an image appears in the Preview Area.

  • (Ruler)

Clicking this button displays rulers at the top and left sides of the Preview Area. Clicking the button toggles the ruler display on and off.

  • (Help)

Clicking this button displays the Online Help.



Scanning Buttons (Network Scan)

Return to Overview

  • [Scan]

Clicking this button scans a document. When scanning is complete, the Color Network ScanGear Main Window closes and the scanned image is transferred to the application. During scanning, a scanning progress dialog box is displayed. To interrupt scanning, click [Cancel].

  • Depending on the application, the Color Network ScanGear Main Window may not close after scanning is complete. In this case, click (Exit) in the Color Network ScanGear Main Window to close it.
  • [Preview]

Clicking this button pre-scans the document and displays a preview image in the Preview Area. After changing the scan settings, click this button once again to display a preview of the image with the new settings.

  • [Clear]

Clicking this button clears the image displayed in the Preview Area. It also cancels the scanning area setting and magnification of the preview image, and returns the Preview Area display to its default size.



Preview Area (Network Scan)

Return to Overview

This area displays a preview of how the image will look after the document is scanned.

Use it to check the the appearance of the image, and to adjust the scanning area or scan settings. Right-clicking on the Preview Area displays a pop-up menu that provides the following functions.


Remark
  • The preview image does not appear when using the ADF for scanning.

  • [Cropping Area]

Displays the [Cropping Area] dialog box, where you can specify the dimensions of the scanning area. This function cannot be selected with 2-sided scanning, when [Auto-adjust Orientation] is selected. For instructions on how to specify the scanning area, see "Specifying the Scanning Area (Network Scan)."

  • [Unit]

Selects the unit used to specify the scanning area (millimeters, inches, or pixels).

  • [Original Frame Erase]

Enables you to specify whether to delete a shadow or frame around the document when scanning. Selecting [On] applies a 2.5 mm white frame around the scanned image.

The [Original Frame Erase] command is not available when the scanning area is specified.

  • The default setting for [Original Frame Erase] is [On]. If you select [Off], streaks may appear on the scanned image.


Settings (Network Scan)

Return to Overview

Click the tabs to access the [Main], [Options], and [Scanner Info] sheets. Use the [Main] sheet to specify scan settings. Use the [Options] sheet to specify processing options. Use the [Scanner Info] sheet to display information about the currently selected scanner. For details about the settings in each sheet, refer to the Online Help for that sheet.



Status Bar (Network Scan)

Return to Overview

The status bar shows the following information, from left to right.

  • The [Color Mode] setting
  • The [Resolution] setting
  • The top left coordinates, and the width and height of the scanning area
  • The amount of memory required to scan the image (units: KB)


Viewing the Online Help (Network Scan)

To view the online help, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • The ScanGear Tool cannot be started at the same time as the Color Network ScanGear driver.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system or the model of the machine.
  1. Click [Help] (or ).


  • 1. Start ScanGear Tool.

For details, see "Selecting the Network Scanner to be Used (Network Scan)."


  • 2. Click [Help].

The online help is displayed.



  • 1. Start Color Network ScanGear from the application.

For details, see "Starting Color Network ScanGear (Network Scan)."


  • 2. Click .

The online help is displayed.



Scanning from the Platen Glass (Network Scan)

Follow the procedure below to scan from the platen glass.


Remark
  1. Start Color Network ScanGear from the application.

For details, see "Starting Color Network ScanGear (Network Scan)."

  1. In the [Main] sheet, select [Platen] for [Original Placement].

  1. Place the document on the platen glass. The document should have the side to be scanned face down, as shown in the illustration.

  • When you scan an A5 document from the platen glass, place the document as shown, and set [Original Size] to [A5R] on the [Main] sheet of Color Network ScanGear.

  1. In the Color Network ScanGear Main Window, set the Color Mode, Resolution, and other scan settings.
  • The available settings and ranges vary depending on the printer model you are using.
  1. To preview the image, click [Preview].

A preview image appears in the Preview Area.

  • You can use the preview image to do the following:
  • Use the toolbar to enlarge the image, or use the settings in the [Options] sheet to adjust the appearance of the image.
  1. Click [Scan].

Scanning starts.

When scanning is complete, the Color Network ScanGear Main Window closes and the scanned image is transferred to the application.

  • After clicking [Scan], do not perform any operation in the Color Network ScanGear Main Window until the scanning progress dialog box is displayed.
  • If Color Network ScanGear does not automatically close after scanning, click (Exit) to close it.
  • Make sure to close the Color Network ScanGear Main Window before exiting the application.


Scanning from the ADF (Network Scan)

Follow the procedure below to scan from the ADF.


Remark
  • When scanning from the ADF, use only standard size documents. To scan documents that are not a standard size, use the platen glass.
  1. Start Color Network ScanGear from the application.

For details, see "Starting Color Network ScanGear (Network Scan)."

  1. In the [Main] sheet, select the document sides to be scanned for [Original Placement].

For 1-sided documents, select [Feeder (1-sided)]; for 2-sided documents, select [Feeder (2-sided)]*.
*MF4380dn Only

  1. In the [Main] sheet, click [Orientation] to display the [Orientation] dialog box, and then set the feeding direction.

For 2-sided documents, specify the Book Opening direction (i.e. the relation between the front and back sides).

For details about the setting, see "Setting the Original Feeding Orientation (Network Scan)."

  1. Load the documents into the ADF.

Load the documents in the orientation specified in the [Orientation] dialog box, with the surface to be scanned face up.

  1. In the Color Network ScanGear Main Window, set the Color Mode, Resolution, and other scan settings.
  • The available settings and ranges vary depending on the printer model you are using.
  1. If necessary specify the scanning area, and then click [Scan].

Scanning starts.

The documents loaded into the ADF are scanned in succession.

  • Check that the documents are correctly loaded in the ADF.
  • When scanning from the platen glass after using the ADF, make sure that the platen glass cover is fully opened before positioning the document.
  • It is not possible to specify the scanning area when scanning 2-sided documents.


Automatically Detecting Original Feeding Orientation (Network Scan)

You can set Color Network ScanGear so that the orientation of documents set the ADF is automatically detected. Documents then scanned from the ADF are displayed with their correct orientation on the computer.

  1. Start Color Network ScanGear from the application.

For details, see "Starting Color Network ScanGear (Network Scan)."

  1. In the [Main] sheet, select [Auto-adjust Orientation].

During scanning, the orientation of the document is detected automatically, and the scanned image is rotated if necessary, so that it is displayed correctly on the computer screen.



Setting the Original Feeding Orientation (Network Scan)

You can set the orientation at which documents are placed in the ADF of the scanner beforehand, so that documents scanned from the ADF are displayed with their correct orientation on the computer.

  1. Start Color Network ScanGear from the application.

For details, see "Starting Color Network ScanGear (Network Scan)."

  1. In the [Main] sheet, click [Orientation].

The [Orientation] dialog box appears.

  1. Select the orientation of the documents to be loaded into the ADF for [Feeding Direction].

For 2-sided documents, also set [Book Opening] to indicate the relation between the front and back sides of a 2-sided document.

  1. When the settings are complete, click [OK] to close the dialog box.


Specifying the Scanning Area (Network Scan)

When scanning from the platen glass, you can display the scan image in the Preview Area, and then select the area to scan within the document. Follow the procedure below to specify the scanning area.

  1. Start Color Network ScanGear from the application.

For details, see "Starting Color Network ScanGear (Network Scan)."

  1. In the [Main] sheet, select [Platen] for [Original Placement].

  1. Click [Preview] to display the image in the Preview Area.
  1. Click [Crop] on the toolbar.

The pointer changes to cross-hairs in the Preview Area, allowing you to select the scanning area.

  1. Drag the mouse from one corner of the rectangular area you want to specify to the diagonally opposite corner.

Once an area is specified, you can change it, as follows:

  • You can drag the area to a different position, or drag the frame handles to change the size of the area.
  • To cancel the scanning area setting, click outside the area.

The specified area is indicated by a broken line.

  • You can also specify the scanning area in the [Cropping Area] dialog box.
    Right-click in the Preview Area, and then select [Cropping Area] to display the [Cropping Area] dialog box. Enter the dimensions of the area to be scanned and click [OK].
  • Although it is not possible to display a preview image when scanning using the ADF, you can still specify the scanning area numerically using the [Cropping Area] dialog box, or by dragging the mouse in the empty Preview Area to roughly define the area.
  • You cannot specify the scanning area in the following cases:
  • When scanning 2-sided documents
  • When [Auto-adjust Orientation] is selected


Summary of Important Features and Settings (Network Scan)

The following setting parameters are available in Color Network ScanGear.

For details, refer to the Online Help in the sheets in which the setting is listed, or in the appropriate dialog box.


  • Basic Settings

Setting Procedure
Color mode for image Select the desired color mode from [Color Mode] in the [Main] sheet.
Scanning resolution Select the desired resolution from [Resolution] in the [Main] sheet.
Size of documents to be scanned Select the desired size from [Original Size] in the [Main] sheet.

  • Image Processing Settings

Setting Procedure
Adjust density Select [Manual] from [Density Adjustment] in the [Main] sheet → move the [Density] slider to adjust the value.
Create color negative image Select [On] from [Reversed Image] in the [Options] sheet.
Mirror image left to right Select [On] from [Mirror Image] in the [Options] sheet.
Rotate image Select the desired angle of rotation from [Image Rotation] in the [Options] sheet.
Setting the brightness, contrast, and gamma for full color scanning In the [Options] sheet, select the color that you want to set from [Channel] → move the [Brightness], [Contrast], and [Gamma] sliders to adjust the settings.

  • Settings for Scanning from the ADF

Setting Procedure
Scan documents from ADF with correct orientation Select [Auto-adjust Orientation] in the [Main] sheet.
- or -
Perform the following steps:
1. In the [Main] sheet, click [Orientation] to display the [Orientation] dialog box.
2. Select the feeding direction of documents (and Book Opening direction for 2-sided documents) in the dialog box.


Settings from a PC (MF4380dn/MF4370dn Only)

This category describes how to set up the machine and check the machine status by using the Remote UI.



System Requirements

The Remote UI has been confirmed to work in the following system environments.


Windows

  • OS
  • Windows 2000
  • Windows XP
  • Windows Vista
  • Windows 7
  • Web Browser
  • Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later

Macintosh

  • OS
  • Mac OS X 10.3 or later, except Mac OS X Classic environment
  • Web Browser
  • Safari 1.3.2 or later


Using the Remote UI

The Remote UI software enables you to access and manage the machine connected to a network using a web browser.

  • Check the machine status from a network computer
  • Set and control the machine from a computer

Starting the Remote UI


Starting the Remote UI

Return to Overview

To start the Remote UI, follow the procedure described below.


Remark
  1. Prepare the Network.

Set up the machine for use in a network, then connect the machine and the computer to your network router or a hub.

  1. Start the web browser.
  1. Enter the IP address of the machine in [Address] or [Location], then press [Enter] on the keyboard.

Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

For details on how to check the IP address, see "Confirming IPv4 Address Settings and Checking IPv4 Connection" or "Confirming IPv6 Address Settings."

The Remote UI screen appears.

  1. Enter the required data.

The required data differ depending on the authentication mode you are using.

  • For default settings:
  • 1. Select [Administrator Mode] or [End-User Mode].

  • If you want to change various settings, select [Administrator Mode]. Selecting [End-User Mode], you cannot change the settings.
  • 2. In case of End-User Mode, enter the User Name.

  • In case that system manager password is set:
  • 1. Select [Administrator Mode] or [End-User Mode].

  • If you want to change various settings, select [Administrator Mode]. Selecting [End-User Mode], you cannot change the settings.
  • 2. Enter the System Manager password or user name.

  1. Click [OK].

[Device] - [Status] page is displayed when you logon the Remote UI.

1 Displays the current status of the machine, etc.
2 Takes you to the Remote UI top page.
3 Displays the online help for the Remote UI.
4 Displays the current status of print jobs, etc.
5 Takes you back to the top of a current page.
6 Displays a list of settings for the machine, etc.
7 Displays one-touch or coded speed dialing data (fax numbers, etc.) registered on the machine.


Checking Device Status and Information

You can view the current status of the machine and also information about the administrator in charge of the machine, the installation location and various machine settings.


Checking Device Status

Changing Paper Settings


Checking Device Information

Checking Device Features

Checking Network Settings

Changing Network Settings


Checking Counter Check


Checking Device Status

Return to Overview

  1. Select [Status] from the menu under [Device].
    If [Status] is not displayed, click [Device].

The [Status] appears displaying the current status of the machine and any error messages. To check details of errors, click [Error Information].



Changing Paper Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Select [Status] from the menu under [Device] → click [Change].

If [Status] is not displayed, click [Device].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Multi-Purpose Tray: Sets the paper size and type on the multi-purpose tray.
Cassette: Sets the paper size and type on the paper cassette.



Checking Device Information

Return to Overview

  1. Select [Information] from the menu under [Device].
    If [Information] is not displayed, click [Device].

The [Information] appears displaying information related to the machine, such as the system manager's information and the location of the machine.



Checking Device Features

Return to Overview

  1. Select [Features] from the menu under [Device].
    If [Features] is not displayed, click [Device].

The [Features] appears displaying following items depending on the current system configuration:

  • Maximum Print Speed
  • Total RAM Size
  • Available RAM Size
  • Number of Cassette


Checking Network Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Select [Network] from the menu under [Device].
    If [Network] is not displayed, click [Device].

The [Network] appears displaying information about the network interface and any network protocols that are enabled.



Changing Network Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Select [Network] from the menu under [Device] → click [Change].

If [Network] is not displayed, click [Device].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Startup Time Settings: Sets the time period required to delay the startup of network communications for the machine.
TCP/IP Settings: Sets TCP/IP network.
Permitted Receiving MAC Address Settings: Sets whether to activate an IP address filter.
Permitted Receiving MAC Address Settings: Sets whether to activate a MAC address filter.
SNMP Settings: Sets detailed information about SNMP.
Ethernet Driver Settings: Specifies the type of network connection.

  • If you are changing the Network Settings, the machine must be restarted to enable the settings. Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.


Checking Counter Check

Return to Overview

  1. Select [Counter Check] from the menu under [Device].
    If [Counter Check] is not displayed, click [Device].

The [Counter Check] appears displaying the total number of pages that have been output for printing, copying, and received job printing.



Job Management

The Remote UI enables you to manage print jobs. It also enables you to view the sending and receiving results of jobs.


Managing Print Jobs

Viewing the Activity Log


Managing Print Jobs

Return to Overview

You can use the Remote UI to manage print jobs that are being processed by the machine, or are held in the print queue.


Remark
  • If [Permit End-user's Job Operation] is not selected in [Register ID and Password] or [Register Password] in [Edit] in [System Settings] under [Menu], you cannot delete any print jobs when the machine is in the End-User Mode. If [Permit End-user's Job Operation] is selected, you can delete print jobs for which you have owner privileges. (See "Customizing System Settings.")
  1. Click [Job Status] → select [Print Job] from the menu that appears under [Job Status].

A list of print jobs waiting or being processed by the machine appears.

  1. To delete a print job, click [Delete] next to the desired job.
  • You cannot recover the job once it is deleted.


Viewing the Activity Log

Return to Overview

The Remote UI enables you to view the [Activity Log] of send and receive jobs. The [Activity Log] shows up to 60 recent transactions.

  1. Click [Job Status] → select [Activity Log] from the menu that appears under [Job Status].

The [Activity Log] appears displaying information about jobs that have already been processed by the machine.



Managing the Address Book

The Remote UI enables you to make additions and changes to each item of the Address.


Remark
  • You can also access these setting menus from the operation panel of the machine. For details, see "Machine Settings."

Registering, Editing and Deleting One-touch Speed Dial

Registering, Editing and Deleting Coded Dial


Registering, Editing and Deleting One-touch Speed Dial

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Address] → [One-touch Speed Dial] from the menu that appears under [Address].

  • If you set an address book password, the screen for entering the password appears when you click [Address].

To view/edit the registered One-touch Speed Dial:

To register a new One-touch Speed Dial:

To delete the registered One-touch Speed Dial:


  • 1. Click the number or the name to display the current address information.

  • You can edit registered addresses only when you are in the Administrator Mode.

  • 2. To edit the information, click [Edit] → make the necessary changes on the Change Address screen → click [OK].


  • 1. Click [None] or any number for which [None] is displayed as the name.


  • 2. Click [Edit].


  • 3. Select [Fax] or [Group] from the drop-down list, press [Select] → enter the necessary information → click [OK].


  • 4. For group dialing, select [Group] from the drop-down list, press [Select] → enter a group name in [Group Name] → click [Address Book] under [Members List].


  • 5. Select [One-touch Speed Dial] from the drop-down list, press [Select] → select the check box next to the number to register for the group dialing → click [OK].


  • 6. Make sure that the registered addresses are displayed in [Members List] → click [OK].


  • 1. Select the check box next to the number to delete → click [Delete].

  • You cannot recover the address once it is deleted.


Registering, Editing and Deleting Coded Dial

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Address] → [Coded Dial] from the menu that appears under [Address].

  • If you set an address book password, the screen for entering the password appears when you click [Address].

To view/edit the registered Coded Dial:

To register a new Coded Dial:

To delete the registered Coded Dial:


  • 1. Click the number or the name to display the current address information.

  • You can edit registered addresses only when you are in the Administrator Mode.

  • 2. To edit the information, click [Edit] → make the necessary changes on the Change Address screen → click [OK].


  • 1. Click [None] or any number for which [None] is displayed as the name.


  • 2. Click [Edit].


  • 3. Enter the necessary information → click [OK].


  • 1. Select the check box next to the number to delete → click [Delete].

  • You cannot recover the address once it is deleted.


Customizing System Settings

The Remote UI enables you to specify the machine's system settings.


Remark
  • You can also access the System Setting from the Operation Panel of the machine. For details, see "Machine Settings."
  1. Click [Menu] → select [System Settings] from the menu that appears under [Menu] → click [Edit].

  1. Enter the necessary information → click [OK].



  • 1. Click [Restrict the Send Function].

  • 2. Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].



  • 1. Click [Register Password].

  • 2. Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

Set Password: Set the System Manager Password to protect the contents of <System Settings>. Once the System Manager Password is set, they must be entered when you access the <System Settings> menu from the operation panel, or when you logon the Remote UI.
System Manager Password: Enter a number (seven digits maximum).
Confirm: Enter the password again. If the number you enter here is different from the number entered for [System Manager Password], an error dialog box appears.
Permit End-user's Job Operation: Select this check box to permit deleting print jobs for which you have owner privileges when the machine is in the End-User Mode from the Remote UI.


Import/Export Function

The Remote UI enables you to save the Address Book data in your computer or load address book into the machine from saved files. The Import/Export function is intended for data exchange, and is available only through the Remote UI.


Remark
  • The Import/Export operation may take more than a few minutes to complete. Do not turn the machine's main power OFF until the operation is complete. Otherwise, the machine may malfunction.
  • Do not operate the machine while importing or exporting an address book.
  • If the machine is in the Sleep mode, press [Energy Saver] on the operation panel to cancel the Sleep mode before performing an Import operation.
  • During an Export operation, the screen display does not change until the operation is complete. Do not click [Start Export] while the hourglass or pointer indicates that the operation is still being processed.
  • [Import/Export] is displayed only when you are in the Administrator Mode.

Saving the Address Book (Export)

Loading an Address Book (Overwrite/Import)


Saving the Address Book (Export)

Return to Overview

You can store the Address Book as a file in your computer.

  1. Click [Menu] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Menu].

  1. Click [Start Export].

  1. Follow the instructions on the screen to specify the location where you want to save the file.

The file is saved in the specified location.



Loading an Address Book (Overwrite/Import)

Return to Overview

You can load address books into the machine from saved files.


Remark
  • If the machine is in the Sleep mode, press [Energy Saver] on the operation panel to cancel the Sleep mode before performing an Import operation.
  • When you register the contents of a new file, the currently registered addresses are overwritten by the new address list.
  • You can register up to 108 addresses in the Address Book. Each address is treated as a separate item.
  • You cannot import the group dialing information which contains another group dialing.
  1. Click [Menu] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Menu].

  1. Click [Import].

  1. Click [Browse] → select the file to import → click [OK].

  • Do not execute any other jobs while importing an address book.
  • If you are using Safari, click [Choose File] instead of [Browse] to select the file of the Address Book data to import.


Device Custom Settings

The machine's custom settings can be edited with the Remote UI.
The following procedures describe how to customize the machine's settings from the Remote UI.


Remark
  • You can also access these setting menus from the Operation Panel of the machine. For details, see "Machine Settings."

Volume Control

Common Settings

Timer Settings

Copy Settings

Fax Settings

Report Settings

Printer Settings


Volume Control

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Menu] → select [Custom Settings] from the menu that appears under [Menu] → click [Volume Control].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Monitor Volume: Sets the volume for monitor tone during the fax transmission.
Calling Tone: Sets the volume of the ring produced when the machine detects a call.
Entry Tone: Sets the volume of beeps produced when pressing the keys on the operation panel.
Error Tone: Sets the volume of beeps produced when an error (e.g., TX error) occurs.



Common Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Menu] → select [Custom Settings] from the menu that appears under [Menu] → click [Common Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Initial Function: Selects which standby display appears when turning on the power.
Use Toner Save Mode: Sets whether to reduce toner consumption.



Timer Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Menu] → select [Custom Settings] from the menu that appears under [Menu] → click [Timer Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Date & Time Setup: Enter date and time.
Use Auto Sleep: Sets the auto Sleep mode when the machine remains idle for a certain period of time.
Use Daylight Saving Time Settings Sets the daylight saving time mode.



Copy Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Menu] → select [Custom Settings] from the menu that appears under [Menu] → click [Copy Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Image Quality: Sets the documents type for copying.
Density: Sets the density for copying.
Paper Size Group: Selects a paper size group for your machine.
Zoom Ratio: Sets the zoom ratio for copying.
Auto Collate: Sets whether to collate the copies automatically.
2-Sided Printing: Sets whether to make the two-sided copies automatically.



Fax Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Menu] → select [Custom Settings] from the menu that appears under [Menu] → click [Fax Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Receive Mode: Selects the receive mode.
User Settings: Specifies the basic operation settings in the fax mode.
TX Settings: Sets the transmission features.
RX Settings: Sets the reception features.
Print Settings: Sets the printer functions.



Report Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Menu] → select [Custom Settings] from the menu that appears under [Menu] → click [Report Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

TX Report: Sets whether to print out the transmission report.
RX Report: Sets whether to print out the reception report.
Activity Report: Sets whether to print an activity report automatically every 60 transactions.



Printer Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Menu] → select [Custom Settings] from the menu that appears under [Menu] → click [Printer Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Error Timeout: Sets the length of time before the machine returns an error when no data is received from the computer.



Network Settings (MF4380dn/MF4370dn Only)

This category describes how to connect the machine to a computer or network and how to set up a network connection environment.



Basic Network Settings

The basic network settings are required in order to use the following functions of the machine.

  • Printing or sending a fax from a computer

  • Scanning documents to a computer

To perform the basic network settings, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.
  1. Checking the Network Environment

The network environment for this machine is based on the assumption that:

  • Computers are connected to the intranet.
  • This machine is connected to a router or hub.
  1. Connect the LAN Cable

  1. Setting and Checking the IP Address


Setting and Checking the IP Address

Setting the IP address to the machine allows it to communicate with computers on the network.


Setting IPv4 Address

The followings are the procedures for specifying the IPv4 Address settings. After configuring the IPv4 Address settings, check that the network connections are properly set. Perform the procedure in "Confirming IPv4 Address Settings and Checking IPv4 Connection."


Setting IPv4 Address Manually


Setting IPv4 Address Automatically


Confirming IPv4 Address Settings and Checking IPv4 Connection


Setting IPv6 Address

The followings are the procedure for specifying IPv6 address settings. After specifying the IPv6 address settings, perform the procedure in "Checking Network Connection (IPv6)," check that the network settings are correct.
The machine can use up to nine of the following IPv6 addresses. With IPv6 communication, multiple IPv6 addresses can be used at the same time.

  • Link local address (1)

An address that is only valid within the same link. A link local address is automatically set using a specific prefix (fe80::) and an interface identifier generated from the MAC address of the machine. When the machine is using the functions of IPv6, one link local address is always registered.

  • Manual address (0 or 1)

A fixed address.

  • Stateless address (0 to 6)

A stateless address is automatically set using the machine's MAC address and the prefix (information indicating the network the machine belongs to) included in the RA (Router Advertisement) notified by the router when the machine is started.

  • Stateful address (0 or 1)

A stateful address can be obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.


Setting the Use of IPv6


Setting the Use of Stateless Address


Setting IPv6 Address Manually


Setting the Use of DHCPv6


Confirming IPv6 Address Settings


Confirming Link local Address


Confirming Stateless Address


Confirming Stateful Address


Confirming Default Router Address


Checking Network Connection (IPv6)



Setting IPv4 Address Manually

Return to Overview

This section describes how to specify the IPv4 address manually.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv4 SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IP ADDRESS AUTO.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the IP address, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SUBNET MASK>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the subnet mask, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <GATEWAY ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the gateway address, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting IPv4 Address Automatically

Return to Overview

This section describes how to specify the IPv4 address automatically.
The default setting is <ON>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv4 SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IP ADDRESS AUTO.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DHCP>, <BOOTP>, or <RARP>, then press [OK].
  • <DHCP>: The machine obtains the necessary information for communication via DHCP.
  • <BOOTP>: The machine obtains the necessary information for communication via BOOTP.
  • <RARP>: The machine obtains the necessary information for communication via RARP.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  • <OFF>: Does not set the selected protocol to obtain the necessary information for communication.
  • <ON>: Sets the selected protocol to obtain the necessary information for communication.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Confirming IPv4 Address Settings and Checking IPv4 Connection

Return to Overview

This section describes how to confirm IPv4 address settings.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <VIEW IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv4>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IP ADDRESS>, <SUBNET MASK>, or <GATEWAY ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  • <IP ADDRESS>: Select this to confirm the current IP address set in the machine.
  • <SUBNET MASK>: Select this to confirm the current subnet mask set in the machine.
  • <GATEWAY ADDRESS>: Select this to confirm the current gateway address set in the machine.
  • If the machine is not communicated with the network properly, the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address are not displayed.
  • If you set the startup time of the machine's network function by following the procedure in "Setting Startup Time," the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address are displayed only after the time set as the startup time passes.
  • If you connect the machine to a switching hub, the machine may not be able to connect to a network even though your network settings are appropriate. This problem may be resolved by delaying the startup of network communications for the machine. See "Setting Startup Time," for information on how to set up the startup time.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Setting the Use of IPv6

Return to Overview

This section describes how to set the use of IPv6.
The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv6 SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USE IPv6>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting the Use of Stateless Address

Return to Overview

This section describes how to set the use of stateless address.
The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv6 SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <STATELESS ADD SET>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting IPv6 Address Manually

Return to Overview

To specify the IPv6 address manually, follow the procedure below.
The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv6 SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANUAL ADD SET>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USE MANUAL ADD>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF> or <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANUAL ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the IPv6 address, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PREFIX LENGTH>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to enter the prefix length, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to enter <DEF. ROUTER ADD>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the default router address, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting the Use of DHCPv6

Return to Overview

This section describes how to set the use of DHCPv6.
The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv6 SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USE DHCPv6>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Confirming IPv6 Address Settings

Return to Overview

You can confirm IPv6 address settings below.


Confirming Link local Address

Confirming Stateless Address

Confirming Stateful Address

Confirming Default Router Address


Confirming Link local Address

Return to Overview

This section describes how to confirm the link local address settings.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <VIEW IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv6>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <LINK LOCAL ADD>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].

The current link local address set in the machine is displayed.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <PREFIX LENGTH>, then press [OK].

The current prefix length set in the machine is displayed.

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Confirming Stateless Address

Return to Overview

This section describes how to confirm the stateless address settings.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <VIEW IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv6>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select from <STATELESS ADD. 1> through <STATELESS ADD. 6>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].

The current stateless address set in the machine is displayed.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <PREFIX LENGTH>, then press [OK].

The current prefix length set in the machine is displayed.

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Confirming Stateful Address

Return to Overview

This section describes how to confirm the stateful address settings.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <VIEW IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv6>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <STATEFUL ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].

The current stateful address set in the machine is displayed.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <PREFIX LENGTH>, then press [OK].

The current prefix length set in the machine is displayed.

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Confirming Default Router Address

Return to Overview

This section describes how to confirm the default router address.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <VIEW IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv6>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DEF. ROUTER ADD>, then press [OK].

The current default router address set in the machine is displayed.

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Checking Network Connection (IPv6)

Return to Overview

This section describes how to check if the IPv6 network connections are set properly.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv6 SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PING COMMAND>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the desired IPv6 address existing on the network, then press [OK].
  • If you set the startup time of the machine's network function by following the procedure in "Setting Startup Time," execute the PING command only after the time set as the startup time passes.
  • If you connect the machine to a switching hub, the machine may not be able to connect to a network even though your network settings are appropriate. This problem may be resolved by delaying the startup of network communications for the machine. See "Setting Startup Time," for information on how to set up the startup time.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Setting Up a Computer for Printing/Sending a Fax

This section describes the procedures for Setting Up a computer for printing/sending a fax.


System Requirements

The following system environments are compatible when printing or sending a fax from a computer:

  • OS
  • Windows 2000 Server
  • Windows 2000 Professional
  • Windows XP Professional
  • Windows XP Home Edition
  • Windows Server 2003
  • Windows Vista
  • Windows Server 2008
  • Windows 7
  • Computers
  • Windows; IBM PC/compatibles
  • Protocol
  • TCP/IP

Remark
  • If you are using Windows 2000, you need to install Service Pack 4 or later.
  • Before setting up a computer for printing/sending a fax, it is necessary to perform the following setup procedures.

Settings from the Machine (Printing from PC/PC Fax)

LPD (Settings from the Machine)


RAW (Settings from the Machine)


Bonjour (Settings from the Machine)


Machine Connection Method (LPD/Raw)

Print Server Settings


Settings from the Machine (Printing from PC/PC Fax)

Return to Overview

You can select the printing method over a TCP/IP network.


LPD (Settings from the Machine)

RAW (Settings from the Machine)

Bonjour (Settings from the Machine)


LPD (Settings from the Machine)

Return to Overview

This section describes how to use LPD as the print application.
The default setting is <ON>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <LPD PRINT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


RAW (Settings from the Machine)

Return to Overview

This section describes how to use RAW as a print application.
The default setting is <ON>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RAW PRINT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Bonjour (Settings from the Machine)

Return to Overview

This section describes how to use Bonjour as a print application.
The default settings are as follows.

  • <USE Bonjour>: <ON>
  • <PRIORITY PROTOCOL>: <LPR>
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <Bonjour SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].

If you select <OFF>, skip to step 10.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <Bonjour NAME >, then press [OK].

The name entered with <Bonjour NAME> is displayed as the machine name on a computer on the network in the Bonjour environment.

  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the Bonjour NAME, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRIORITY PROTOCOL>, then press [OK].

When printing by network-connecting the machine and a computer with Bonjour, the protocol selected by <PRIORITY PROTOCOL> is used.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <LPR> or <RAW>, then press [OK].
  • <LPR>: Uses LPR as the print server protocol for Bonjour.
  • <RAW>: Uses Raw as the print server protocol for Bonjour.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Machine Connection Method (LPD/Raw)

Return to Overview

  • Connecting to a TCP/IP Network:

All computers that use the machine must have TCP/IP client software installed and must be enabled for TCP/IP network use. For details, see the manuals provided with the operating system.

  • Installing the Printer Driver and Specifying the Machine Destination Setting:

To print from a computer, you must install a printer driver and specify a setting for the machine destination. The machine destination setting differs depending on the print application used for printing. Use the following information as a guide to determine the print application you are using, and then perform the necessary operations.

  • LPD: This is the print application generally used with TCP/IP.
  • Raw: This is a print application used with Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008. It can print at higher speeds than LPD.

Remark
  • In the following procedures, items displayed on the screen for Windows XP are used; items may differ depending on your operating system.
  1. Open the printer properties dialog box.

For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printer] under [Hardware and Sound].

For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Devices and Printers].

For Windows 2000, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Settings] → [Printers].

For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Printers and Faxes].

For Windows XP Home Edition, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].

  1. Right-click the icon of the printer you installed → select [Properties].
  1. Display the [Ports] sheet by clicking the [Ports] tab.

  1. Open the [Printer Ports] dialog box by clicking [Add Port].
  1. From [Available ports types], select [Standard TCP/IP Port] → click [New Port].

The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard starts.

  1. Click [Next].
  1. In [Printer Name or IP Address], enter the machine IP address or machine host name → click [Next].

After the computer confirms that there is a machine in which the entered IP address is assigned, the [Completing the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window appears.

  1. Click [Finish].

If the dialog box displays [Additional Port Information Required], follow the instructions on the screen to search again, or click [Standard] → click [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100] from the pull-down list → click [Next].

  1. Click [Close] to close the [Printer Ports] dialog box.
  1. In the printer properties dialog box, click [Configure Port] → Click [LPR] under [Protocol] → enter a print queue in [Queue Name] under [LPR Settings].

If you want to use Raw, confirm [Raw] under [Protocol] is selected, and proceed to step 11.

  • You can specify a print queue in [Queue Name]. The following three print queues are available:
    LP: The machine prints according to its spool settings. Normally select this option.
    SPOOL: The machine prints only after spooling a print job on the hard disk, regardless of its spool settings.
    DIRECT: The machine prints without spooling a print job on the hard disk, regardless of its spool settings.
  1. Click [OK].
  1. Click [Close].


Print Server Settings

Return to Overview

If Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008 is on your network, the following procedure enables you to set up a print server for more efficient management of network printers. Once a print server is set up, print jobs can be managed by the print server. Also, by setting up an alternate driver for the print server, printer drivers can be installed in each computer via the network.

  1. Open the printer properties dialog box.

For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Printers]

For Windows 2000, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Settings] → [Printers].

For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Printers and Faxes].

For Windows XP Home Edition, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].

For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Devices and Printers].

  1. Right-click the icon of the printer you installed → select [Sharing] (For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, select [Printer Properties], and then click the [Sharing] tab).
  1. For Windows Vista/7/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2, click [Change sharing options].

For other operating systems, go to the next step.

  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008, click [Continue].
  1. Select [Share this printer] (Windows 2000: [Shared as]) and enter a share name.
  1. If this machine is shared with users running different versions of Windows, click [Additional Drivers].

When the alternate driver is installed, additional windows will open for entering the location of the file containing the printer driver. Follow the instructions in these windows.

  • To install the printer driver on another computer, use the [Printer Wizard] window for selecting the printer destination → select [Network printer] → select the shared printer for the computer selected in the print server.
  1. Click [OK].

The shared printer settings are complete.



Additional Network Settings

Depending on your network environment, additional network settings may be required.


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.

Setting SNMP

Setting Speed and Duplex

Setting Startup Time

Setting the Use of HTTP

Setting Port Number

Setting IPv4 DNS

Setting IPv6 DNS

Controlling Machine Access Using IPv4 addresses

Controlling Machine Access Using IPv6 addresses

Limiting Machine Access to a Certain MAC Address


Setting SNMP

Return to Overview

SNMP helps monitor the state of the machine and collects information on it. The following two items can be set:

<COMMUNITY NAME>:
Sets the SNMP community name. You can specify up to two community names.

<SNMP WRITABLE>:
Enables the computers on the network to access the machine and modify its settings if this item is activated. You can specify this setting for each community separately.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <USE SNMP>: ON
  • <COMMUNITY NAME 1>: public
  • <SNMP WRITABLE 1>: ON
  • <SNMP WRITABLE 2>: OFF
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SNMP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USE SNMP>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  • If you want to use a Canon printer driver or utility, select <ON> for <USE SNMP>.
  • You can restrict the IP addresses of computers on which items can be set or browsed. If you restrict the IP addresses, you cannot use the Remote UI to set or browse detailed information on computers other than those whose IP addresses are allowed, even if <USE SNMP> is <ON>. For details, see "Controlling Machine Access Using IPv4 addresses."
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNITY NAME 1>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the desired community name other than "public," then press [OK].

If you do not need to specify <COMMUNITY NAME 2>, skip to step 11.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNITY NAME 2>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the desired community name, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SNMP WRITABLE 1>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].

If you do not need to specify <SNMP WRITABLE 2>, skip to step 15.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <SNMP WRITABLE 2>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting Speed and Duplex

Return to Overview

This section describes how to specify the communication method and Ethernet connection type.
The default settings is <AUTO>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ETHERNET DRIVER>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <AUTO DETECT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <AUTO> or <MANUAL>, then press [OK].
  • <AUTO>: Automatically determines the communication mode (Half duplex/Full duplex) and Ethernet type (10Base-T/100Base-TX). Skip to step 11.
  • <MANUAL>: You have to manually specify the communication mode and Ethernet type. Go to the next step.
  • If you reconnect the network cable (for example, reconnect the cable to a different Ethernet hub) with the power ON, the Auto Detect function will not work even if you set <AUTO DETECT> to <AUTO>. (Connect the cable with the power OFF.)
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNICATN MODE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FULL DUPLEX> or <HALF DUPLEX>, then press [OK].
  • <FULL DUPLEX>: Sends and receives simultaneously.
  • <HALF DUPLEX>: Sends and receives alternately.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ETHERNET TYPE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <100Base-TX> or <10Base-T>, then press [OK].
  • <100Base-TX>: Establishes a 100Base-TX network connection.
  • <10Base-T>: Establishes a 10Base-T network connection.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MAC ADDRESS>, then press [OK].

The machine's MAC address is displayed.

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting Startup Time

Return to Overview

If you connect the machine to a switching hub, it may not be able to connect to a network even though your network settings are set appropriate.
This occurs because the spanning tree process performed between switching hubs prevents them from communicating with each other immediately after the machine connects to a switching hub. In this case, use the following procedure to delay the startup of network communication.
The default setting is <0SEC>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <STARTUP TIME SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the time period required to delay the startup of network communications for the machine, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting the Use of HTTP

Return to Overview

This section describes how to restrict the use of Remote UI.
The default setting is <ON>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USE HTTP>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting Port Number

Return to Overview

Depending on your network environment, you can change the port number for each protocol. The default settings are as follows:

  • <LPD>: <515>
  • <RAW>: <9100>
  • <HTTP>: <80>
  • <SNMP>: <161>
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PORT NO SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the protocol of which you want to change the port number (LPD, RAW, HTTP, or SNMP), then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the port number, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting IPv4 DNS

Return to Overview

DNS (Domain Name Service) is a service used for associating a host name (which is a name of a computer or a printer on a TCP/IPv4 network) with a unique IPv4 address.
The default setting is <OFF> for <DNS DYNA. UPDATE>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv4 SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DNS SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DNS SERVER SET>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRIM. DNS SERVER>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the IPv4 address of a primary DNS server, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SECOND DNS SERVER>, then press [OK].

If you do not need to specify secondary DNS server, skip to step 12.

  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the IPv4 address of a Secondary DNS server, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <HOST/DOMAIN NAME>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <HOST NAME>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the desired host name, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DOMAIN NAME>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the network domain name, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DNS DYNAMIC SET>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <DNS DYNA. UPDATE> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  • The DNS dynamic update function enables the machine to register its IP address, host name, and domain name to the DNS server automatically. This function is available in the environment where there is a dynamic DNS server.
  • To use the DNS dynamic update function, enter the IP address of a DNS server, and the host name and domain name of the machine.
  • If you have a DHCP server running Windows 2000 Server that uses the DHCP service and want to register the machine's DNS record, configure the following settings in the DHCP server:
  • Under the DHCP server, right-click the [Scope] icon → click [Properties]. In the [DNS] sheet of the displayed dialog box, select [Automatically update DHCP client information in DNS] → [Update DNS only if DHCP client requests].
  • If you have a DHCP server running Windows Server 2003/2008/2008 R2 that uses the DHCP service and want to register the machine's DNS record, configure the following settings in the DHCP server:
  • Under the DHCP server, right-click the [Scope] icon → click [Properties]. In the [DNS] sheet of the displayed dialog box, select [Enable DNS dynamic updates according to the settings below] → [Dynamically update DNS A and PTR records only if requested by the DHCP clients].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Setting IPv6 DNS

Return to Overview

DNS (Domain Name Service) is a service used for associating a host name (which is a name of a computer or a printer on a TCP/IPv6 network) with a unique IPv6 address.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <SAME HOST/DOMAIN>: <ON>
  • <DNS DYNA. UPDATE>: <OFF>
  • <REG. MANUAL ADD>: <OFF>
  • <REG. STATEFUL ADD>: <OFF>
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv6 SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DNS SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DNS SERVER SET>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRIM. DNS SERVER>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the IPv6 address of a primary DNS server, then press [OK].
  • If you set <USE DHCPv6> set to <ON>, the IP address of a DNS server you set manually will be overwritten. See "Setting the Use of DHCPv6."
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SECOND DNS SERVER>, then press [OK].

If you do not need to specify secondary DNS server, skip to step 11.

  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the IPv6 address of a Secondary DNS server, then press [OK].
  • If you set <USE DHCPv6> set to <ON>, the IP address of a DNS server you set manually will be overwritten. See "Setting the Use of DHCPv6."
  1. Press [] or [] to select <HOST/DOMAIN NAME>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SAME HOST/DOMAIN>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
  • <ON>: Sets the same host name or domain name used with IPv4 communication for IPv6 communication. Press [OK] and skip to step 19.
  • <OFF>: Sets a different host name or domain name for IPv6 communication.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <HOST NAME>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the desired host name, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DOMAIN NAME>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the network domain name, then press [OK].
  • If you set <USE DHCPv6> to <ON>, the IP address of a DNS server you set manually will be overwritten. See "Setting the Use of DHCPv6."
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DNS DYNAMIC SET>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <DNS DYNA. UPDATE> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REG. MANUAL ADD>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF> or <ON>, then press [OK].
  • <OFF>: Does not register a manual address in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.
  • <ON>: Registers a manual address in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REG. STATEFUL ADD>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF> or <ON>, then press [OK].
  • <OFF>: Does not register a stateful address in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.
  • <ON>: Registers a stateful address in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.
  • Windows 2000 Server/Server 2003 and Windows Server 2008 do not support DHCPv6 servers.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Controlling Machine Access Using IPv4 addresses

Return to Overview

This section describes how to restrict machine access from the computers on the network by specifying the range of IP addresses allowed or forbidden to access the machine.
The default settings is <OFF>

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv4 SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SET IP ADD RANGE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select from <IP ADDRESS 1> through <IP ADDRESS 10>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PERMIT/REJECT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REJECT> or <PERMIT>, then press [OK].
  • <REJECT>: Restricts the access to the machine (printing/PC faxing/Remote UI) from the computers with certain IP addresses.
  • <PERMIT>: Permits the access to the machine (printing/PC faxing/Remote UI) from the computers with certain IP addresses.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <START IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the start IP address, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <END IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the end IP address, then press [OK].

To enter another IP address range, repeat step 8 to 13.

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Controlling Machine Access Using IPv6 addresses

Return to Overview

This section describes how to restrict machine access from the computers on the network by specifying the range of IP addresses allowed or forbidden to access the machine.
The default settings is <OFF>

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv6 SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SET IP ADD RANGE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select from <IP ADDRESS 1> through <IP ADDRESS 10>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PERMIT/REJECT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REJECT> or <PERMIT>, then press [OK].
  • <REJECT>: Restricts the access to the machine (printing/PC faxing/Remote UI) from the computers with certain IP addresses.
  • <PERMIT>: Permits the access to the machine (printing/PC faxing/Remote UI) from the computers with certain IP addresses.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <START IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the start IP address, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <END IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the end IP address, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PREFIX LENGTH>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF> or <ON>, then press [OK].
  • <OFF>: Does not set the prefix length.
  • <ON>: Sets the prefix length.
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the prefix length, then press [OK].

To enter another IP address range, repeat step 8 to 16.

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Limiting Machine Access to a Certain MAC Address

Return to Overview

This section describes how to restrict machine access from computers on the network by specifying the MAC addresses of the computers allowed to access the machine.
The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PERMIT RX MAC ADD>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select from <PERMIT RX ADD 1> through <PERMIT RX ADD 5>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the MAC address of the computer allowed to access the machine, then press [OK].

Repeat step 7 and 8 to specify other MAC addresses.

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it ON again.



Managing the Machine

The machine enables you to use any of the following software to check the status and to specify the settings on your computer.

  • Web browser (Remote UI)
  • NetSpot Device Installer (Canon utility software included in the User Software CD)

Machine Management Using Web Browser (Remote UI)

You can use Remote UI installed in the machine to manage it on a web browser.
For using Remote UI, see "Using the Remote UI."


Machine Management Using NetSpot Device Installer

NetSpot Device Installer is utility software for specifying the initial settings of Canon devices connected to a network. Available on the CD-ROM, NetSpot Device Installer can be accessed directly without installation, enabling network users to quickly and easily specify the initial settings of network devices.
For instructions on how to use NetSpot Device Installer, see the online help for NetSpot Device Installer.



Security

This category describes the security features.



Specifying the System Manager Settings

You can set a password for the System Manager. Once the System Manager Password is set, restrictions can be placed on storing or changing the System Settings.


Remark
  • If you make a mistake when entering a number, press [Clear] to clear the entire number → enter the correct number.
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Password has been set, enter the System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYS. MANAGER INFO>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM PASSWORD>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter a number, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Device Information Settings

You can set a name for the machine, and enter information regarding its location.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Password has been set, enter the System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <DEVICE INFO>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DEVICE NAME>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the device name (maximum 32 letters, including spaces) with - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <LOCATION>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the location information (maximum 32 letters, including spaces) with - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Restricting Access to Destinations

You can send the documents with following restrictions or settings.


Restricting Redial

Confirming Entered Fax Numbers


Restricting Redial

Return to Overview

You can specify whether or not to allow using [Redial/Pause].
The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Password has been set, enter the System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ACCESS TO DEST.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RESTRICT REDIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Confirming Entered Fax Numbers

Return to Overview

You can specify whether or not to confirm the entered fax numbers each time you send a fax. The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Password has been set, enter the System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ACCESS TO DEST.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CONFIRM FAX NO.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  • <ON>: The confirmation screen appears when you enter a fax number using - [numeric keys].
  • <OFF>: The confirmation screen does not appear.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Introduction of the Machine

This category describes the features of the machine and its useful functions.



Available Features

The table below shows the available features on a product basis.


: available
—: not available


COPY PRINT SCAN FAX Remote UI (Network Board) Simplex ADF Duplex ADF
imageCLASS
MF4380dn
—
imageCLASS
MF4370dn
—
imageCLASS
MF4350d
— —


Machine Components

This section describes the parts names of the machine and their functions.


External View (Front)

External View (Back)


External View (Front)

Return to Overview

  • MF4380dn



1 ADF (Automatic Document Feeder)
Holds documents and feeds them automatically into the scanning area.
2 Slide guides
Adjust to the width of the document.
3 Document feeder tray
Holds documents.
4 Document delivery tray
Receives documents.
5 Operation panel
Controls the machine.
6 Output tray
Receives copies, prints and faxes.
7 Paper cassette (For MF4380dn/MF4370dn)/Paper feeding tray (For MF4350d)
Loads the paper supply.
8 Scanning area
Scans documents from the ADF.
9 Platen glass
Place documents.
10 Output tray extension
Extends for the output tray.
11 Paper stopper
Prevents the paper from falling off the output tray. Open the paper stopper from its original position for LTR/A4 paper. For LGL paper, pull out the output tray extension first, and then open the paper stopper.
12 Slide guides for multi-purpose tray
Adjust to the width of the paper.
13 Paper guide rail
Holds the paper supply.
14 Dust cover
Protects the paper supply in the paper cassette or paper feeding tray from the dirt and dust.
15 Multi-purpose tray
Feeds paper when you insert one by one manually.
16 Scanning platform
Open this platform when replacing the toner cartridge or clearing paper jams.
17 Main power switch
Turns the power ON or OFF.

  • MF4370dn




  • MF4350d





External View (Back)

Return to Overview

  • MF4380dn

1 Ethernet port (MF4380dn/MF4370dn Only)
Connect the network cable.
2 USB port
Connect the USB (Universal Serial Bus) cable.
3 Rear cover
Open this cover when clearing paper jams.
4 Power socket
Connect the power cord.
5 Telephone line jack
Connect the telephone cable.
6 External device jack
Connect an external device.

  • MF4370dn


  • MF4350d



Operation Panel

This section describes the names and functions of the operation panel keys, and describes all the parts on the operation panel.


Main Operation Panel

Fax Operation Panel


Main Operation Panel

Return to Overview



1 [Paper Settings] key
Press to specify the paper size and type for the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray.
2 [Job Cancel/Status Monitor] key
Press to check and cancel jobs being processed or waiting to be processed.
3 [COPY] key
Press to switch to the Copy mode.
4 [FAX] key
Press to switch to the Fax mode.
5 [SCAN] key
Press to switch to the Scan mode.
6 [Menu] key
Press to select or cancel the modes in Additional Functions.
7 [2-Sided] key
MF4380dn:
Press to copy or fax 2-sided documents.
MF4370dn/MF4350d:
Press to copy 1-sided documents as 2-sided copies.
8 [Enlarge/Reduce] key
Press to enlarge or reduce copy ratio.
9 [Density] key
Press to adjust the density for copy or documents you send.
10 [Image Quality] key
Press to select image quality for copy or fax.
11 [Collate/2 on 1] key
Press to collate copies, or press to set 2 on 1 copying.
Also press to set ID card copying.
12 [Energy Saver] key
Press to set or cancel the Sleep mode manually. The key lights green when the Sleep mode is set, and goes off when the mode is canceled.
13 [Stop/Reset] key
Press to stop a current job. Also, press to return the machine to the standby mode.
14 Error indicator
Blinks when an error has occurred.
15 Processing/Data indicator
Blinks while sending or receiving faxes. Lights when the machine has waiting jobs and stores the data in memory.
16 [Start] key
Press to start copying, scanning and sending faxes.
17 Numeric keys
Enter letters and numbers.
18 [Tone] key
Press to switch from rotary pulse to tone dialing.
19 [Clear] key
Press to clear entered alphanumeric characters.
20 [] key
Press to increase the value for various settings. Also press to see the next item in the menu.
21 [OK] key
Press to accept a set function or mode. Also press and hold to print a sample page when you are in the copy mode. For details, see "Printing a Sample Page."
22 [] key
Press to decrease the value for various settings. Also press to see the previous item in the menu.
23 Display
Displays messages and prompts during operation. Displays selection, text, and numbers when adjusting the settings.
24 [Report] key
Press to print reports and lists manually.


Fax Operation Panel

Return to Overview



1 [Hook] key
Press when you want to dial without lifting up the handset of the external telephone.
2 [Redial/Pause] key
Press to redial the last dialed number when fax is standing by, or press to insert a pause when entering a fax number.
3 [Coded Dial] key
Press to specify recipients registered under coded dial codes.
4 [Address Book] key
Press to search pre-registered recipients under one-touch keys and coded dial codes by name or fax number.
5 One-Touch keys
Press to specify recipients registered under one-touch keys.


Display (Standby Mode)

Copy Mode

Fax Mode

Scan Mode

Remark
  • Depending on your needs, you can change the standby display which appears when the main power switch is turned ON. For details, see "Setting the Initial Function."
  • When the main power switch is turned ON, the display displays <PLEASE WAIT> until the standby display appears.
  • If the machine remains idle for one minute, the display returns to the standby mode (Auto Clear Function).


Copy Mode

Return to Overview

This section describes the copy standby mode. Be sure to press [COPY] to switch to the following display whenever using copy functions:


1 Zoom ratio 2 Paper size
3 Quantity 4 Image quality
5 Density


Fax Mode

Return to Overview

This section describes the fax standby mode. Be sure to press [FAX] to switch to the following display whenever using fax functions:


1 Date & Time 2 Image quality
3 Receive mode


Scan Mode

Return to Overview

This section describes the scan standby mode. For MF4380dn/MF4370dn, press [SCAN] repeatedly to select <USB SCANNING> or <NETWORK SCANNING>.

For MF4350d, press [SCAN] to display <SCANNING MODE>.



Entering Characters

For displays that require alphanumeric entries, follow the procedure below to enter characters.
Example: Enter <Canon>. For details on entering characters, see "Information About the Keys."

  1. Press repeatedly until an uppercase <C> appears.
  1. Press [] to move the cursor to the right, then press until an <a> appears.
  1. Press until an <n> appears.
  1. Press [] to move the cursor to the right, then press until an <o> appears.
  1. Press [] to move the cursor to the right, then press until an <n> appears.


Registering Destinations in the Address Book

The Address Book is a feature used for storing fax numbers. The Address Book is divided into one-touch keys and coded dial codes. You can store up to 8 destinations in one-touch keys, and 100 destinations in coded dial codes, for a total of 108 destinations in the whole Address Book. You can also register multiple destinations for a group address, and assign a one-touch key or coded dial code to this group. Registering a destination in the Address Book saves you the effort of entering that destination's fax number each time you send a fax.


Remark
  • Destinations stored in the Address Book can be exported to your computer as a file, which can be imported into the machine. For information on exporting the Address Book, see "Import/Export Function."

Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys

Registering One-Touch Keys


Editing One-Touch Keys


Erasing One-Touch Keys


Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes

Registering Coded Dial Codes


Editing Coded Dial Codes


Erasing Coded Dial Codes


Storing/Editing Recipients for Group Dialing

Registering Group Addresses


Adding New Destination to Group


Deleting Destination from Group


Changing Group Name


Deleting Group Addresses



Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys

Return to Overview

This section describes how to register destinations for one-touch keys and to edit the registered one-touch keys.



Registering One-Touch Keys

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <1-TOUCH SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 08) for which you want to register the fax number, then press [OK].

You can also select a one-touch key by pressing the corresponding one-touch key.

  1. Enter the destination name (up to 20 letters, including spaces) with - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Enter the fax number you register (up to 50 digits, including spaces and pauses) with - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

To register another one-touch key, repeat the procedure from step 4.

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Editing One-Touch Keys

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <1-TOUCH SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the one-touch key (01 to 08) you want to edit, then press [OK].

You can also select a one-touch key by pressing the corresponding one-touch key.

  1. Press [] repeatedly to go to the character you want to change, then press [Clear].

To delete the entire entry, press and hold [Clear].

  1. Enter a new character with - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [] repeatedly to go to the number you want to change, then press [Clear].

To delete the entire entry, press and hold [Clear].

  1. Enter a new number with - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Erasing One-Touch Keys

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <1-TOUCH SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 08) you want to erase, then press [OK].

You can also select a one-touch key by pressing the corresponding one-touch key.

  1. Press and hold [Clear] to erase the destination name, then press [OK].
  1. Press and hold [Clear] to erase the fax number, then press [OK].
  • If you erase the fax number, the registered name is cleared automatically.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes

Return to Overview

This section describes how to register destinations for coded dial codes and to edit the registered coded dial codes.



Registering Coded Dial Codes

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CODED DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a coded dial code (00 to 99) for which you want to register the fax number, then press [OK].

You can also select a coded dial code by pressing [Coded Dial] followed by the desired two-digit code.

  1. Enter the destination name (up to 20 letters, including spaces) with - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Enter the fax number you register (up to 50 digits, including spaces and pauses) with - [numeric keys], then press [OK]

To register another coded dial code, repeat the procedure from step 4.

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Editing Coded Dial Codes

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CODED DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the coded dial code (00 to 99) you want to edit, then press [OK].

You can also select a coded dial code by pressing [Coded Dial] followed by the two-digit code.

  1. Press [] repeatedly to go to the character you want to change, then press [Clear].

To delete the entire entry, press and hold [Clear].

  1. Enter a new character with - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [] repeatedly to go to the number you want to change, then press [Clear].

To delete the entire entry, press and hold [Clear].

  1. Enter a new number with - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Erasing Coded Dial Codes

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CODED DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the coded dial code (00 to 99) you want to erase, then press [OK].

You can also select a coded dial code by pressing [Coded Dial] followed by the two-digit code.

  1. Press and hold [Clear] to erase the destination name, then press [OK].
  1. Press and hold [Clear] to erase the fax number, then press [OK].
  • If you erase the fax number, the registered name is cleared automatically.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Storing/Editing Recipients for Group Dialing

Return to Overview

This section describes how to register destinations for group addresses and to edit the registered group addresses.



Registering Group Addresses

Return to Overview


Remark
  • The recipients must be registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes beforehand.
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select an empty one-touch key that you want to set as the group address, then press [OK].

You can also select a one-touch key by pressing the corresponding one-touch key.

  1. Enter the group name (up to 20 letters, including spaces) with - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Select the destinations you want to register in the group (up to 50 destinations) until all destinations are registered, then press [OK].
  • To enter a recipient stored under a one-touch key, press the desired one-touch key.
  • To enter a recipient stored under a coded dial code, press [Coded Dial], then enter the two-digit code with - [numeric keys]. For multiple entries, press [Coded Dial] between each entry.

To register another group, repeat the procedure from step 4.

  • You can review the destinations which have been already entered with [] or [].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Adding New Destination to Group

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a group to edit, then press [OK].

You can specify a group to edit by pressing the corresponding one-touch key.

  1. Press [OK].
  1. Select the destination you want to add to the group, then press [OK].

For details on specifying a recipient from Address Book, see "Registering Group Addresses."

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Deleting Destination from Group

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a group to edit, then press [OK].

You can specify a group to edit by pressing the corresponding one-touch key.

  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to display the recipient you want to delete from the group, then press [Clear].

Repeat this step if you want to delete another recipient.

  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Changing Group Name

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a group to edit, then press [OK].

You can specify a group to edit by pressing the corresponding one-touch key.

  1. Press [] repeatedly to go to the character you want to change, then press [Clear].

To delete the entire name, press and hold [Clear].

  1. Enter a new character with - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Deleting Group Addresses

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a group to delete, then press [OK].

You can specify a group to delete by pressing the corresponding one-touch key.

  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press [Clear] repeatedly until all recipients are deleted, then press [OK].
  • When you delete all destinations, the registered name is cleared automatically.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Toner Cartridges

The average print yield of the Canon genuine starter toner cartridge which comes with the machine is 1,000 pages, the Canon genuine replacement toner cartridge is 2,000 pages. The page counts are on the basis of "ISO/IEC 19752"* when printing A4 size paper with the default print density setting. The level of toner consumption varies depending on the type of documents printed. If your average document contains a lot of graphics, tables, or charts, the average print yield of the toner cartridge will be fewer as they consume more toner. When you are replacing a toner cartridge, be sure to use a toner cartridge designed for this product. To purchase the Canon genuine replacement toner cartridge, contact your local Canon dealer or Canon Customer Care Center (U.S.A.:1-800-OK-CANON, Canada:1-800-652-2666).

* "ISO/IEC 19752" is the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that may contain printer components" issued by ISO (International Organization for Standardization).


Model Name Type Supported Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge Average Print Yield
MF4380dn/MF4370dn/MF4350d Bundled Canon Cartridge 104 Starter 1,000 pages
Replacement Canon Cartridge 104 2,000 pages

Maintaining the Toner Cartridge

Checking the Toner Level


Maintaining the Toner Cartridge

Return to Overview

Note the following when handling the toner cartridge.


Remark
  • Do not place the toner cartridge in fire. Toner powder is flammable.
  • If there is a toner powder leakage, make sure not to inhale or touch the toner powder. If it comes in contact with your skin, rinse with cold water using soap. If you feel an irritation on your skin or inhale the powder, consult a doctor immediately.
  • When removing the toner cartridge from the machine, make sure to remove it carefully. If not removed with care, the toner powder may scatter and come in contact with your eyes and mouth. If this happens, rinse with water and consult a doctor immediately.
  • Keep the toner cartridge away from small children. If they ingest the toner powder, consult a doctor immediately.
  • Do not disassemble the toner cartridge. The toner powder may scatter and come in contact with your eyes and mouth. If this happens, rinse with water and consult a doctor immediately.

  • Keep the toner cartridge away from computer screens, disk drives, and floppy disks. The magnet inside the toner cartridge may harm these items.
  • Avoid locations subject to high temperature, high humidity, or rapid changes in temperature.
  • Do not expose the toner cartridge to direct sunlight or bright light for more than five minutes.
  • Store the toner cartridge in its protective bag. Do not open the bag until you are ready to install the toner cartridge in the machine.
  • Save the toner cartridge's protective bag in case you need to repack and transport the toner cartridge at a later date.
  • Do not store the toner cartridge in a salty atmosphere or where there are corrosive gases such as from aerosol sprays.
  • Do not remove the toner cartridge from the machine unnecessarily.
  • Do not open the drum protective shutter on the toner cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.
  • Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle to avoid touching the drum protective shutter.
  • Do not place the toner cartridge in an upright or an upside down position. If toner becomes caked in the toner cartridge, it may become impossible to free it even by shaking the toner cartridge.
  • For optimum print quality, when you replace toner cartridges, using Canon genuine ones is recommended.
  • Be Careful of Counterfeit Toner Cartridges
    Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of non-genuine Canon toner cartridge or counterfeit toner cartridge.
    For details, see http://www.canon.com/counterfeit.


Checking the Toner Level

Return to Overview

You can check the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridge.

  1. Press [Job Cancel/Status Monitor] repeatedly to select <TONER GAUGE>, then press [OK].

The toner level is displayed in the display at five levels. If the toner gauge indicates that the toner is empty, it is recommended that the toner cartridge be replaced. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")


  • Toner full


  • Toner high


  • Toner low


  • Toner near empty


  • Toner empty

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Telephone Line Settings

Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine.
If this setting is incorrect, you will be unable to communicate with other machines. Make sure to check the type of telephone line that you are using, and make the correct setting.
The default setting is <TOUCH TONE>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TEL LINE TYPE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the telephone line type, then press [OK].
  • <TOUCH TONE>: Tone dialing
  • <ROTARY PULSE>: Pulse dialing
  • If you do not know the type of telephone line you use, contact your local telephone company.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Placing Documents

This section describes how to place your documents on the platen glass and in the ADF.


On the Platen Glass

In the ADF


On the Platen Glass

Return to Overview

  1. Lift up the ADF.
  1. Place a document face down.
  1. Align the document with the appropriate paper size marks.

If your document does not match any of the paper size marks, align the center of your document with the arrow mark.

  1. Gently lower the ADF.

The document is ready for scanning.

  • When closing the ADF, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  • Do not press down the ADF forcefully, as this may damage the platen glass and cause personal injury.
  • Remove the document from the platen glass when scanning is complete.


In the ADF

Return to Overview

  1. Fan the document stack and even the edges.
  1. Adjust the slide guides to the width of the documents.
  1. Neatly place the documents face up in the document feeder tray.

The document is ready for scanning.

  • Do not add or remove documents while they are being scanned.
  • When scanning is complete, remove the documents from the document delivery tray to avoid paper jams.
  • Avoid using ADF to scan the same document more than 30 times. When scanned repeatedly, documents can become folded or torn, which may cause paper jams.
  • If the feeder rollers are soiled from scanning a document written in pencil, clean them. (See "Cleaning the Machine.")


Loading Paper

This section describes how to load paper in the paper cassette and the multi-purpose tray.


Remark
  • The default paper size/type is set to <LTR> and <PLAIN PAPER> in the setting menu. When you load other size and/or type of paper, change the paper size/type setting by pressing [Paper Settings]. (See "Setting Paper Size and Type.")

In the Paper Cassette

For MF4380dn/MF4370dn


For MF4350d


In the Multi-Purpose Tray

For MF4380dn/MF4370dn


For MF4350d



In the Paper Cassette

Return to Overview

This section describes how to load paper in the paper cassette.



For MF4380dn/MF4370dn

Return to Overview

  1. Take out the dust cover.
  1. Open the front panel of the paper cassette.
  1. Slide out the paper guide rail (A).
  1. Slide the side paper guides (A) to match the size of paper.
  • If the paper guides do not fit the size of the paper, the printout may be skewed.
  1. Fan the paper stack and even the edges.
  1. Load the paper into the paper cassette with the print side up. Make sure the paper stack sits below the small fin (A) on the side paper guide.
  1. Adjust the paper guide rail to match the size of paper.
  1. Close the front panel of the paper cassette.
  • To load Legal-size paper, leave the front panel of paper cassette open and adjust the paper guide rail (A) for Legal size paper.

  1. Match up the edge of the dust cover (A) and the edge of the paper cassette (B), and place the cover on top of the cassette.


For MF4350d

Return to Overview

  1. Open the paper feeding tray.
  1. Take out the dust cover from inside the machine.
  1. Slide out the paper guide rail (A).
  1. Slide the side paper guides (A) to match the size of paper.
  • If the paper guides do not fit the size of the paper, the printout may be skewed.
  1. Fan the paper stack and even the edges.
  1. Load the paper into the paper feeding tray with the print side up. Make sure the paper stack sits below the hook (A) on the side paper guide.
  1. Adjust the paper guide rail to match the size of paper.
  1. Aligning the protrusions (A) on the both sides of the dust cover to the guides (B) inside the machine, set the dust cover.


In the Multi-Purpose Tray

Return to Overview

Use the multi-purpose tray when you want to copy or print on the different paper which is in the paper cassette. Load paper one by one in the multi-purpose tray.


Remark
  • The paper in the multi-purpose tray is fed prior to the paper in the paper cassette.
  • The recommended envelopes are COM10 (#10), MONARCH, DL, and ISOC5. Using other envelopes may affect the quality of the printout.
  • Make sure to set the correct paper size in the printer driver.
  • When printing received documents or reports, paper can be fed only from the paper cassette. If paper is loaded into the multi-purpose tray, <REMOVE MP PAPER> appears.


For MF4380dn/MF4370dn

Return to Overview

  1. Spread the paper guides a little wider than the actual paper width.
  1. When setting paper, gently insert the paper into the multi-purpose tray with the print side up.

When setting an envelope, gently insert the envelope into the multi-purpose tray with the print side up and the right edge (i.e., closer to the stamp) first.

  • When you load paper with a logo on, position the paper with the print side up (logo side) and insert it so that the top of the paper feeds first in the multi-purpose tray.
  1. Slide the paper guides so that they fit to both sides of the paper.
  • If the paper guides do not fit the size of the paper, the print quality may be deteriorated.
  1. Specify the size and the type of the paper you load.

For details on how to specify the paper size and type, see "Setting Paper Size and Type."



For MF4350d

Return to Overview

  1. Spread the paper guides a little wider than the actual paper width.
  1. When setting paper, gently insert the paper into the multi-purpose tray with the print side up.

When setting an envelope, gently insert the envelope into the multi-purpose tray with the print side up and the right edge (i.e., closer to the stamp) first.

  • When you load paper with a logo on, position the paper with the print side up (logo side) and insert it so that the top of the paper feeds first in the multi-purpose tray.
  1. Slide the paper guides so that they fit to both sides of the paper.
  • If the paper guides do not fit the size of the paper, the print quality may be deteriorated.
  1. Specify the size and the type of the paper you load.

For details on how to specify the paper size and type, see "Setting Paper Size and Type."



Setting Paper Size and Type

This section describes how to specify the paper size and type you are loading in the paper cassette and the multi-purpose tray. Whenever you change the paper size and type in the cassette and the tray, follow the procedure in this section to adjust the paper size and type settings for the cassette and the tray.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <PAPER SIZE>: LTR
  • <PAPER TYPE>: PLAIN PAPER

For the Paper Cassette

For the Multi-Purpose Tray


For the Paper Cassette

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Paper Settings] repeatedly to select <CASSETTE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper size, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper sizes:

<LTR>, <LGL>, <A4>, <B5>, <A5>, <EXECUTIVE>, <COM10>, <MONARCH>, <DL>, <ISO-C5>, <OFICIO>, <BRAZIL-OFICIO>, <MEXICO-OFICIO>, <GOVERNMENT-LETTER>, <GOVERNMENT-LEGAL>, <FOOLSCAP>

  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper type, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper types:

  • <PLAIN PAPER> or <PLAIN PAPER L>*1 for Plain paper (17 lb to 24 lb (64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2))
  • <HEAVY PAPER> or <HEAVY PAPER H>*2 for Heavy paper (Paper cassette: 28 lb to 34 lb (105 g/m2 to 128 g/m2), Multi-purpose tray: 28 lb to 43 lb (105 g/m2 to 163 g/m2)) or Envelope
  • <TRANSPARENCY> for Transparency

*1 If paper curls excessively when printed with <PLAIN PAPER> selected, select <PLAIN PAPER L>.
*2 If print fixing is not sufficient when printed with <HEAVY PAPER> selected, select <HEAVY PAPER H>.

  • If you have selected <B5>, <A5>, <EXECUTIVE>, <COM10>, <MONARCH>, <DL> or <ISO-C5> for the paper size in step 2, <PAPER TYPE> is not displayed.


For the Multi-Purpose Tray

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Paper Settings] repeatedly to select <MP TRAY>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper size, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper sizes:

<LTR>, <LGL>, <A4>, <B5>, <A5>, <EXECUTIVE>, <COM10>, <MONARCH>, <DL>, <ISO-C5>, <OFICIO>, <BRAZIL-OFICIO>, <MEXICO-OFICIO>, <GOVERNMENT-LETTER>, <GOVERNMENT-LEGAL>, <FOOLSCAP>

  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper type, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper types:

  • <PLAIN PAPER> or <PLAIN PAPER L>*1 for Plain paper (17 lb to 24 lb (64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2))
  • <HEAVY PAPER> or <HEAVY PAPER H>*2 for Heavy paper (Paper cassette: 28 lb to 34 lb (105 g/m2 to 128 g/m2), Multi-purpose tray: 28 lb to 43 lb (105 g/m2 to 163 g/m2)) or Envelope
  • <TRANSPARENCY> for Transparency

*1 If paper curls excessively when printed with <PLAIN PAPER> selected, select <PLAIN PAPER L>.
*2 If print fixing is not sufficient when printed with <HEAVY PAPER> selected, select <HEAVY PAPER H>.

  • If you have selected <B5>, <A5>, <EXECUTIVE>, <COM10>, <MONARCH>, <DL> or <ISO-C5> for the paper size in step 2, <PAPER TYPE> is not displayed.


Setting the Tone Volume

This section describes how to adjust the tones that the machine sounds during operation or fax transmission.


Setting the Monitor Volume

Setting the Audible Tones


Setting the Monitor Volume

Return to Overview

The monitor volume can be adjusted. Follow the procedure described below.
The default setting is <2>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <VOLUME CONTROL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MONITOR VOLUME>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the volume (0 to 3), then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Setting the Audible Tones

Return to Overview

Various tone volume can be adjusted. Follow the procedure described below.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <CALLING TONE>: 2
  • <ENTRY TONE>: 2
  • <ERROR TONE>: 2
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <VOLUME CONTROL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting item, then press [OK].
  • <CALLING TONE>: Sets the volume of the ring produced when the machine detects a call.
  • <ENTRY TONE>: Beeps when pressing the keys on the operation panel.
  • <ERROR TONE>: Beeps when an error (e.g., TX error) occurs.
  1. Press [] or [] to select the volume (0 to 3), then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Setting the Date and Time

This section describes how to set the current date and time, and the daylight saving time.


Setting the Current Date and Time

Setting the Daylight Saving Time


Setting the Current Date and Time

Return to Overview

You can set the current date and time. The current date and time settings are used as standard timer settings for functions that require them.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TIMER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DATE&TIME SETTING>, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the date (month/day/year) and time (in 24-hour format), then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Setting the Daylight Saving Time

Return to Overview

In some countries or areas, time is advanced throughout the summer season. This is called "Daylight Saving Time." This section describe how to set the Daylight Saving Time.
The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TIMER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DAYLIGHT SV.TIME>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <START DATE/TIME>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MONTH>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the month, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <WEEK>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the week, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DAY>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the day, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <END DATE/TIME>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MONTH>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the month, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <WEEK>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the week, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DAY>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the day, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Setting the Sleep Mode

If the machine remains idle for a certain period of time, it automatically enters the Sleep mode.

The default settings are as follows:

  • <AUTO SLEEP>: ON
  • <AUTO SLEEP TIME>: 5MIN.
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TIMER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <AUTO SLEEP>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired interval, then press [OK].
  • You can set the interval from 3 to 30 minutes (in one-minute increments).
  • You can also enter values using - [numeric keys].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  • [Energy Saver] lights green when the machine enters the Sleep mode.
  • To enter the Sleep mode manually, press [Energy Saver] on the operation panel.
  • The machine will not enter the Sleep mode when:
  • the machine is in operation
  • the Processing/Data indicator lights or blinks
  • a message appears on the display and the Error indicator blinks
  • paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray
  • a paper jam occurs in the machine
  • the handset of the external telephone is off the hook
  • The machine will leave the Sleep mode when:
  • you place documents in the ADF
  • you press [Energy Saver] on the operation panel
  • a fax is received
  • the handset of the external telephone is off the hook
  • a print job is sent from a computer, and the print is started


Customizing Settings

You can specify the settings that are common to the copy, fax, and scan functions.


Setting the Initial Function

Setting the Toner Save Mode

Changing the Language Shown on the Display


Setting the Initial Function

Return to Overview

You can specify the standby display which appears when you turn ON the main power switch. The default setting is <COPY>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <INITIAL FUNCTION>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the initial function, then press [OK].
  • <COPY>: Displays the Copy mode screen.
  • <FAX>: Displays the Fax mode screen.
  • <SCAN>: Displays the Scan mode screen.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Setting the Toner Save Mode

Return to Overview

You can set the toner consumption for printing.
The default setting is <OFF>.


Remark
  • When you set [On] or [Off] in [Toner Save] in the printer driver, this function is not effective when printing documents from your computer. However, when [Printer Default] is set in the [Toner Save] in the printer driver, this function is effective for printing from your computer.
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TONER SAVER MODE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Changing the Language Shown on the Display

Return to Overview

You can change the language displayed on the display and printed on reports.
The default setting is <ENGLISH>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DISPLAY LANGUAGE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired language, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Summary of Reports and Lists

The machine prints the following reports and lists.

  • 1-TOUCH LIST: Lists the names and fax numbers of recipients registered under one-touch keys.
  • CODED DIAL LIST: Lists the names and fax numbers of recipients registered in coded dial codes.
  • GROUP DIAL LIST: Lists the names and fax numbers of recipients registered in each group dialing group.
  • USER DATA LIST: Lists all the current settings and registered sender information.
  • TX REPORT: Shows the transmission result. Can be set to print automatically.
  • RX REPORT: Shows the reception result. Can be set to print automatically.
  • ACTIVITY REPORT: Shows the last 60 transactions performed by the machine.
  • MEMORY DATA LIST: Lists reserved jobs stored in memory.
  • MEMORY IMAGE PRNT: Shows information and the first page of a reserved job.
  • LOST REPORT: Lists received documents that were lost from the memory due to power cut. Cannot be manually printed out.


Printing Reports Automatically

TX REPORT, RX REPORT, and ACTIVITY REPORT can be set to print automatically.


TX Report

RX Report

Activity Report


TX Report

Return to Overview

This section describes how to set TX reports to print automatically.
The default setting is <PRINT ERROR ONLY>.

The following items are printed in a TX Report:

  • JOB NO.: Job number
  • MODE: Mode of transaction (G3 or ECM)
  • NO.: Sequence number
  • DESTINATION TEL/ID: Name and number of recipient
  • START TIME: Date and time of transaction
  • PAGE: Number of pages sent
  • RESULT: Result of transaction
  • OK: Transmission successful
  • NG: Transmission failed
  • STOP: Transmission manually canceled before completion
  • NO ANSWER: Call not answered
  • PAPER JAM: ADF jam occurs during Manual TX
  • Error code: For descriptions of error codes, see "Error Codes."
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX REPORT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].
  • <PRINT ERROR ONLY>: Prints a report only when a transmission error occurs.
  • <OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report.
  • <OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report every time you send a document.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


RX Report

Return to Overview

This section describes how to set RX reports to print automatically.
The default setting is <OUTPUT NO>.

The following items are printed in an RX Report:

  • JOB NO.: Job number
  • MODE: Mode of transaction (G3 or ECM)
  • NO.: Sequence number
  • DESTINATION TEL/ID: Number of the sending machine (displayed only if registered in their machine)
  • START TIME: Date and time of transaction
  • PAGE: Number of pages received
  • RESULT: Result of transaction
  • OK: Reception successful
  • NG: Reception failed
  • STOP: Reception manually canceled before completion
  • MEM.FULL: Memory became full during reception.
  • Error code: For descriptions of error codes, see "Error Codes."
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX REPORT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].
  • <OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report.
  • <OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report every time you receive a document.
  • <PRINT ERROR ONLY>: Prints a report only when a reception error occurs.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Activity Report

Return to Overview

This section describes how to set Activity Reports to print automatically.
The default setting is <OUTPUT YES>.

The following items are displayed in the Activity Report:

  • NO.: Transaction number (01 to 60)
  • JOB NO.: Job number
  • START TIME: Date and time of transaction
  • MODE: Mode of transaction (G3 or ECM)
  • DESTINATION TEL/ID: Name and number of recipient
  • PAGE: Number of pages sent or received
  • RESULT: Result of transaction, transaction duration
  • OK: Transaction successful
  • NG: Transaction failed
  • Error code: For descriptions of error codes, see "Error Codes."
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ACTIVITY REPORT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].
  • <OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report after every 60 transactions.
  • <OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Printing Reports and Lists Manually

You can print the following reports and lists manually.

  • TX REPORT
  • RX REPORT
  • ACTIVITY REPORT
  • MEMORY DATA LIST
  • MEMORY IMAGE PRNT
  • 1-TOUCH LIST
  • CODED DIAL LIST
  • GROUP DIAL LIST
  • USER DATA LIST

Remark
  • For information on the supported paper size for printing reports or lists, see "Display Messages."
  1. Press [Report] repeatedly to select a desired report or list, then press [OK].

If no relevant data is stored in memory, <NO DATA> is displayed.



Checking and Canceling Report Jobs

You can check the status of report jobs and cancel a job before the printing starts.


Remark
  • Make sure that the Processing/Data indicator is on or blinking. When the Processing/Data indicator is off, there are no jobs in the memory of the report job status.
  1. Press [Job Cancel/Status Monitor] repeatedly to select <REPORT STATUS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to scroll through the job list, and check the status of the report jobs.

If you want to cancel the job, go to step 3. Otherwise, go to step 6.

  1. Press [] or [] to select the job you want to cancel, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CANCEL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] to select <YES>.

If you do not want to cancel the job, press [] to select <NO>.

  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Checking Remaining Memory

You can check the remaining memory according to the status of the machine.

  1. Press [Job Cancel/Status Monitor] repeatedly to select <AVAILABLE MEMORY>, then press [OK] to confirm the remaining memory.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Checking Print and Scan Counts

You can check the number of printed or scanned pages in total.

  1. Press [Job Cancel/Status Monitor] repeatedly to select <VIEW PAGE TOTALS>, then press [OK]
  1. Press [] or [] to view the print or scan counts.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Introduction (Printer Driver)

Canon printer driver enables you to print from any application software to the machine. Taking full advantage of your computer's processing power to compress the print data, this driver executes the high-speed data processing.

You can update your printer driver software and acquire information about Canon products on the Canon home page (http://www.usa.canon.com). Driver software is updated every few months.



Introduction (Fax Driver)

The fax driver gives users of Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7, or Windows Server 2008 operating system the ability to make full use of the fax function of the printer.

The fax driver is conceptually akin to a printer driver. A user would select [Print] from any Windows application software, select the Canon fax driver as the printer, and specify its destination(s) and options.

The fax driver would then convert this into an image that conforms to standard fax protocols, to be printed or stored on the recipient fax machine(s).



Setting Up the Machine

This chapter describes the settings before using the machine.



Set Up the Machine to Suit Your Purposes

Determine which machine functions (Copy, Fax, Print, PC Print, PC Fax, Scan, Remote UI) you intend to use, and make the settings according to the flowchart below.
For example, when you use copy function only, follow "Required Settings." When you use both copy and fax functions, follow "Required Settings" and "Fax Settings."



Set Up the Machine

Items Included with the Machine

Install Toner Cartridge

Set Up Paper Cassette and Load Paper

Connect Power Cord and Turn On the Machine


Items Included with the Machine

Return to Overview


  • MF4380dn
  • Machine

  • Dust Cover

  • Paper Cassette

  • MF4370dn
  • Machine

  • Dust Cover

  • Paper Cassette

  • Document Feeder Tray

  • MF4350d
  • Machine

  • Dust Cover (enclosed in the machine)

  • Document Feeder Tray

  • Items for All Models
  • Toner Cartridge

  • Power Cord

  • Telephone Cable

  • Destination Labels

  • Starter Guide
  • Basic Operation Guide
  • User Manual CD-ROM
  • User Software CD-ROM
  • Limited Warranty Notice
  • Registration Card
  • Installation Space
  • MF4380dn

  • MF4370dn

  • MF4350d

  • Manuals for the Machine

  • Starter Guide:
    The Starter Guide contains the machine setup and software installation. Read this guide before operating this product.
  • Basic Operation Guide:
    The Basic Operation Guide contains the basic operation features.
  • e-Manual (located on the User Manual CD-ROM):
    The e-Manual is a web browser-based manual that you can see on your computer. This guide contains total operation features. (Also includes the Starter Guide contents and the Basic Operation Guide contents.)


Install Toner Cartridge

Return to Overview

  1. Take out the toner cartridge from the bag.
  • Do not open the drum protective shutter (A).

  1. Gently rock the toner cartridge several times to evenly distribute the toner inside.
  1. Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface and pull the seal completely out.
  • Do not pull the seal out at an angle.
  • If toner is adhered on the removed seal, be careful that your hands or clothes do not get dirty from touching the toner.
  • If your hands or clothes get dirty from touching the toner, wash them immediately in cold water. Do not use hot water. If you do, the toner may be set permanently.

  1. Hold the front side of the operation panel with your hands.
  1. Lift the scanning platform (A) until it is locked. (You will hear an audible "click.")
  1. Hold the grip (A) on the right front side of the toner cover.
  1. Open the toner cover.
  1. Hold the toner cartridge by its handle (A).
  1. Insert the toner cartridge so that the protrusion on the right side of the toner cartridge (A) fits into the guide (B) located on the right side of the machine and slide it down parallel to the guide.
  1. Push the toner cartridge to make sure it is properly set in the machine.
  1. Hold the grip (A) on the right front side of the toner cover.
  1. Close the toner cover.
  1. Lower the scanning platform.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  • If you cannot close the toner cover, do not force it to close. Open the cover and make sure the toner cartridge is properly set in the machine.


Set Up Paper Cassette and Load Paper

Return to Overview


  • For MF4380dn/MF4370dn

  1. Align the guides (B) on the both edges of the paper cassette to the protrusions (A) inside the machine.
  • Install the paper cassette with the front end tilted upwards.

  1. Push the paper cassette down until the hooks (A) on both sides of the paper cassette engage the protrusions (B) inside the machine.

  1. Open the front panel of the paper cassette.

  1. Slide out the paper guide rail (A).

  1. Slide the side paper guides (A) to match the size of paper.
  • If the paper guides do not fit the size of the paper, the printout may be skewed.

  1. Fan the paper stack and even the edges.

  1. Load the paper into the paper cassette with the print side up. Make sure the paper stack sits below the small fin (A) on the side paper guide.

  1. Adjust the paper guide rail to match the size of paper.

  1. Close the front panel of the paper cassette.
  • To load Legal-size paper, leave the front panel of paper cassette open and adjust the paper guide rail (A) for legal-size paper.


  1. Match up the edge of the dust cover (A) and the edge of the paper cassette (B), and place the cover on top of the cassette.
  • For MF4370dn, attach the document feeder tray on the document feeder.

  • The default paper size/type is set to <LTR> and <PLAIN PAPER> in the setting menu. When you load other size and/or type of paper, change the paper size/type setting by pressing [Paper Settings]. For details, see "For the Paper Cassette."
  • If a printout falls out of the output tray, extend the output tray extension on the front side of the machine and set the paper stopper upright.


  • For MF4350d

  1. Open the paper feeding tray.

  1. Take out the dust cover from inside the machine.

  1. Slide out the paper guide rail (A).

  1. Slide the side paper guides (A) to match the size of paper.
  • If the paper guides do not fit the size of the paper, the printout may be skewed.

  1. Fan the paper stack and even the edges.

  1. Load the paper into the paper feeding tray with the print side up. Make sure the paper stack sits below the hook (A) on the side paper guide.

  1. Adjust the paper guide rail to match the size of paper.

  1. Aligning the protrusions (A) on the both sides of the dust cover to the guides (B) inside the machine, set the dust cover.

  1. Attach the document feeder tray on the document feeder.
  • The default paper size/type is set to <LTR> and <PLAIN PAPER> in the setting menu. When you load other size and/or type of paper, change the paper size/type setting by pressing [Paper Settings]. For details, see "For the Paper Cassette."
  • If a printout falls out of the output tray, extend the output tray extension on the front side of the machine and set the paper stopper upright.



Connect Power Cord and Turn On the Machine

Return to Overview

  1. Connect the power cord into the rear socket on the back side of the machine and the wall outlet, and press the [I] side of the main power switch (A) to turn ON.
  • Do not connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable at this time. Connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable only during the software installation procedure. (A USB cable is not used when the machine is used via a network connection.)
  1. The machine enters the standby mode.

Remark
  • If the LCD display turned OFF(Sleep mode), press [Energy Saver] to turn the display back ON and continue the setup.
  • If <CLOSE COVER/TONER COVER> is displayed, make sure that the toner cover and scanning platform are closed properly. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")


Make Fax Settings

This section describes the fax settings.


Connect Telephone Cables

Register User Telephone Number and Unit Name

Information About the Keys


About Sender Information


Set Date and Time

Select the Receive Mode that Suits Your Needs

About the Receive Modes


If You Need to Use Pulse Dialing



Connect Telephone Cables

Return to Overview


  • Connect the supplied telephone cable to the telephone line jack (A) on the back side of the machine and the wall jack.

  • If you want to connect your own external telephone or telephone with built-in answering machine, connect it to external device jack (B) on the back side of the machine.



Register User Telephone Number and Unit Name

Return to Overview

Before sending documents, you MUST register your fax number, unit name, and the current date and time in the machine.



Information About the Keys

Return to Overview

Use the keys below to enter information in the machine.

You can enter the following characters in each input mode:

  • Use the - [numeric keys] to enter characters.
  • Press - [numeric keys] repeatedly until the required character appears.
  • Press to enter symbols.
  • Press to switch between input modes:
    [A]: Letter mode
    [1]: Number mode
  • Press [] or [] to move the cursor position.
  • Press [Clear] to delete the character at the cursor position. Hold [Clear] to delete the entire entry.

Remark
  • If the LCD display turned OFF(Sleep mode), press [Energy Saver] to turn the display back ON and continue the setup.
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <UNIT TELEPHONE #>, then press [OK].
  1. Use the - [numeric keys] to enter your fax number (up to 20 digits including spaces), then press [OK]. (For information on how to enter characters, see "Information About the Keys.")
  1. Confirm that <UNIT NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Use the - [numeric keys] to enter the unit name (up to 32 characters) (your name, company name, etc.), then press [OK]. (For information on how to enter characters, see "Information About the Keys.")
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the Standby mode.


About Sender Information

Return to Overview

The sender information you register in the machine appears in the header of each page received by your recipient.



Set Date and Time

Return to Overview

Before using the machine, you MUST set the current date and time. The current date and time settings are used as standard timer settings for functions that require them.

  • Entering Information
  • Use - [numeric keys] to enter numbers.
  • Press [] or [] to move the cursor position.
  • Press [OK] to confirm the entry.
  • Press [Clear] to delete entire entry.


Remark
  • If the LCD display turned OFF(Sleep mode), press [Energy Saver] to turn the display back ON and continue the setup.
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TIMER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <DATE & TIME SETTING> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Use - [numeric keys] to enter the date (month/day/year) and time (in 24-hour format), then press [OK].
  • If you accidentally enter an incorrect number, press [] or [] to move the cursor to the number that needs correction and overwrite it.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • You can select one of the following three date formats in <DATE TYPE SELECT>.
    <MM/DD/YYYY>
    <DD/MM YYYY>
    <YYYY MM/DD>
  • By default, <DAYLIGHT SV. TIME> in the <TIMER SETTINGS> menu is set to <OFF>.


Select the Receive Mode that Suits Your Needs

Return to Overview

Your machine provides several methods for receiving fax documents.



About the Receive Modes

Return to Overview


  • <FaxOnly>

Receives faxes automatically. When you use only the fax function, select this mode without connecting to the external telephone.

When Receiving FAX: The machine receives faxes automatically.

When Receiving VOICE CALL: The machine does not respond.

  • <FAX/TEL>

Automatically switches between fax and a voice call. The machine receives faxes automatically and rings for voice calls.

When Receiving FAX: The machine receives faxes automatically.

When Receiving VOICE CALL: The machine rings. Answer the call.

  • <AnsMode>

Receives faxes automatically and routes voice calls to the telephone with built-in answering machine.

When Receiving FAX: The telephone with built?in answering machine rings and the machine receives faxes automatically.

When Receiving VOICE CALL: The telephone with built-in answering machine rings and records voice messages.

  • <MANUAL>

Rings for every call, whether it is fax or a voice call. For fax. For a fax call, you have to manually activate the machine to receive the fax.

When Receiving FAX: The external phone rings. To receive the fax, you can either pick up the receiver and press the [Start] key, or press the [Hook] key followed by the [Start] key. Alternatively, you can use the remote reception function through the external telephone.

When Receiving VOICE CALL: The external telephone rings. Answer the call.

The receive mode determines how the machine responds to incoming faxes and voice calls. Select the mode that most suits your needs from the chart below. For more information about the receive modes, see "Methods for Receiving Faxes."

  • The remote reception function is useful when the receive mode is set to <MANUAL> and your machine is connected to an external telephone. You can receive faxes by picking up the external telephone and pressing a two-digit remote reception ID (the default setting is 25). For details, see "Activating the Remote Reception (Fax)."
  • Your telephone with built-in answering machine or answering machine must be connected directly to the machine to use <AnsMode>. Make sure that the auto answering function of the telephone built-in answering or answering machine is activated. (See "Connect Telephone Cables.")
  • The external telephone must be connected to the machine to use <FAX/TEL> or <MANUAL>. (See "Connect Telephone Cables.")
  • By default, <FaxOnly> is selected in <RX MODE>. If an external telephone is connected to the machine and receives a fax or voice call, the external telephone rings. You can answer voice calls while the external telephone is ringing. To disable the incoming ring, press [Menu] → <FAX SETTINGS> → <RX SETTINGS> → <INCOMING RING>, then select <OFF>.
  • Voice mail is not supported with <AnsMode>.
  • DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) service assigns two or more telephone numbers with distinctive ring patterns to a single telephone line, allowing you to have both a fax number(s) and a telephone number(s), using only one telephone line. Your machine automatically monitors incoming calls and the ring pattern, to let you know if the call is fax or voice call. Set the ring patterns assigned by your telephone company for a fax or voice call. Contact your telephone company for information on availability.

Remark
  • If the LCD display turned OFF(Sleep mode), press [Energy Saver] to turn the display back ON and continue the setup.
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX MODE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the receive mode, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


If You Need to Use Pulse Dialing

Return to Overview

By default, the telephone line type on the machine is set to tone dialing. If you use tone dialing, skip the following procedure.
If you use pulse dialing, follow the procedure below and change the telephone line type setting on the machine to pulse dialing.
If you do not know the type of telephone line you use, contact your local telephone company.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TEL LINE TYPE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select telephone line type, then press [OK].
  • <TOUCH TONE>: Tone dialing (Default)
  • <ROTARY PULSE>: Pulse dialing
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the Standby mode.


Set Up Network Connection (MF4380dn/MF4370dn Only)

If you are using the MF4350d, skip this chapter.


Connect the LAN Cable

Connect the Machine to Network

Specify the IP Address Settings

Automatic Setting


Check IP Address Setting


Manual Setting



Connect the LAN Cable

Return to Overview

Connect a LAN cable that is compatible with the LAN connector of this machine.

  • Compatible LAN Cables

A category 5 or greater twisted pair LAN cable is compatible with the machine. Connect one end to the 10Base-T/100Base-TX port on the back of the machine and the other end to a network router or a hub.

  • A LAN cable is not included with the machine.
  • If you use the machine as a local printer, connect the machine directly to a computer using a USB cable.


Connect the Machine to Network

Return to Overview

To use the machine by connecting to the network, you must set up the IP address.
An IP (Internet Protocol) address is an identification number assigned to each individual computer connected to the Internet.
To use the following functions, you must set up the IP address in advance.

  • Remote UI: Access and change the machine settings from browser on the computer by using the Remote UI software.
  • PC print: Print the documents on the computer.
  • PC fax: Fax the document from the computer.
  • Scan: Save scanned documents to the computer.

The following flow chart indicates the settings needed for each function.



Specify the IP Address Settings

Return to Overview

This section describes how to specify the IP address to the machine.



Automatic Setting

Return to Overview

By default, the IP address is assigned to the machine automatically by the DHCP server. Therefore, all you need to do when using DHCP is just to connect the network cable. After connecting the LAN CABLE, wait for 30 seconds until the machine gets the IP address.



Check IP Address Setting

Return to Overview

To make sure this machine is communicating to the network properly, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator performs the procedure below.
  • Before performing the procedure below, make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to a network.
  • If the LCD display turned OFF(Sleep mode), press [Energy Saver] to turn the display back ON and continue the setup.
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <VIEW IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv4>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IP ADDRESS>, <SUBNET MASK>, or <GATEWAY ADDRESS>, then press [OK].

If the machine is communicating to the network properly, the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address are displayed.
If not, IP address, subnet mask and gateway address are not displayed.
If the machine does not get the IP address in 30 seconds after you connect the LAN cable, turn OFF the main power switch once, and then turn it ON again and wait for another 90 seconds. If the machine still does not get the IP address, ask your network administrator.

  • It is recommended that you take a note of the IP address you confirmed here, because you need it for using the Remote UI.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.

If they are not displayed, that indicates that the machine is not communicating to the network. Check the setting of the IP address.



Manual Setting

Return to Overview

This is the setting for the Static IP. If the machine obtains IP address automatically in "Automatic Setting", skip this setting.
In this setting, you enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway address manually. [Menu] → <SYSTEM SETTINGS> → <NETWORK SETTINGS> → <TCP/IP SETTINGS> → <IPv4 SETTINGS> → <IP ADDRESS AUTO> → <OFF> → <IP ADDRESS> → Enter the IP address → <SUBNET MASK> → Enter the subnet mask → <GATEWAY ADDRESS> → Enter the gateway address → Press [Stop/Reset] → Turn OFF the main power → Restart the machine.
For more information on this setting, see "Setting and Checking the IP Address." Once you complete the setting, please proceed to "Check IP Address Setting."



Set Up Computers and Software

Types of Connection between Computers and the Machine

About User Software CD-ROM

Network Connection (MF4380dn/MF4370dn Only)

USB Connection


Types of Connection between Computers and the Machine

Return to Overview

There are two ways to connect the machine and computers: USB connection and network connection.

Network Connection is available only for MF4380dn/MF4370dn.

The following functions are available with Network Connection: PC Print, Remote UI, PC Fax, Scan

For more information on how to use each function with network connection, refer to the following:

PC Print → "Printing through Network Connection."
Remote UI → "Using the Remote UI."
PC Fax → "PC Fax."
Scan → "Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer (MF4380dn/MF4370dn Only)."

  • USB Connection (For details about the set up, see "USB Connection.")

The following functions are available with USB Connection: PC Print, PC Fax, Scan

For more information on how to use each function with USB Connection, refer to the following:

PC Print → "Printing through USB Connection."
PC Fax → "PC Fax."
Scan → "Scanning Documents to a Computer Connected with USB Cable."

  • You can use the USB connection and network connection together.

System Requirements

  • Windows 2000
    CPU: Intel Pentium/133MHz or faster
    Memory: 128MB or more
  • Windows XP
    CPU: Intel Pentium/Celeron series 300MHz or faster
    Memory: 128MB or more
  • Windows Server 2003*
    CPU: Intel Pentium/Celeron series 133MHz or faster
    Memory: 128MB or more
    *Network only
  • Windows Vista
    CPU: Intel Pentium 800MHz or faster
    Memory: 512MB or more
  • Windows Server 2008*
    CPU: Intel processor/1GHz (x86 processor), 1.4GHz(x64 processor) or faster
    Memory: 512 MB RAM or more
    *Network only
  • Windows 7
    CPU: 1 GHz (x86 processor, x64 processor) or faster
    Memory: 1 GB (x86 processor), 2 GB (x64 processor) or more


About User Software CD-ROM

Return to Overview


  • <Drivers & Toolbox>
  • Printer Driver

Using the Printer Driver, the various data processing tasks conventionally executed within the printer are appropriately divided between the host computer and the printer to greatly reduce the overall printing time. The workload can be delegated to match the output data, thus realizing a significant increase in speed through optimization.

  • FAX Driver

The FAX Driver is conceptually akin to a printer driver. A user selects [Print] from any Windows application software, selects the Canon fax driver as the printer, and specifies its destination(s) and options. The FAX Driver would then converts this into an image that conforms to standard fax protocols, to be printed or stored on the recipient fax machine(s).

  • XPS Driver

The Canon XPS Printer Driver enables you to print documents in Windows Vista from applications that use the XPS format, utilizing the features and characteristics of the XPS format to the maximum extent.

  • USB Scanner Driver (ScanGear MF)

Scanner Driver enables computer to use the machine as a scanner.

  • Scanner Driver is not supported on Windows Server 2003 and Windows Server 2008.

  • MF Toolbox

MF Toolbox is a program that allows you to easily import images scanned with a scanner into an application, attach them to e-mail messages, save them to hard disks, etc.

  • MF Toolbox is not supported on Windows Server 2003 and Windows Server 2008.

  • Network Scanner Driver (Color Network ScanGear)

Install this software to use the machine as a scanner on a network.

  • Color Network ScanGear is available only for MF4380dn/MF4370dn.
  • Color Network ScanGear is not supported on all of the 64-bit operating systems.
  • <Bundled Programs>
  • Presto! PageManager

Presto! PageManager makes it easy to scan, share and organize photos and documents. For details, see the online manual and online help for this program.

  • To install Presto! PageManager, load the User Software CD into a computer, click on the [Custom Installation] button on the CD-ROM Setup screen, click on the [Next] button for USB connection , then follow the instructions that appear on the screen.

  • NetSpot Device Installer (NSDI)

NetSpot Device Installer enables you to set up the machine for network operations. For details, see the Readme file and online help for this program.

  • NetSpot Device Installer (NSDI) is not supported on Windows Server 2008 (32bit) and all of the 64-bit operating systems.


Network Connection (MF4380dn/MF4370dn Only)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • The following procedures are explained using sample screens from Windows XP Professional.
  • The screen may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  • Log on as an Administrator to install the software.
  • Click on the circled button on each screen to proceed to the next step.

  • MF Driver Installation


Insert the User Software CD-ROM.

If the CD-ROM Setup screen is not displayed, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [My Computer].
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008: click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Computer].
Windows 2000: double-click [My Computer] on the Windows desktop.
Right-click on the CD-ROM icon and select [Open], then double-click [MInst] ([MInst.exe]).



While installing the software on a computer running Windows Server 2003, the display in this step does not appear.



  • If the firewall is applied to the operating system, the dialog box below appears. Click [Yes] and continue the installation.



Select your machine on the list. Make sure that the machine name is highlighted. Click [Next>].

  • The machine name displayed on this screen varies depending on the model of your machine.

Select [Printer] and [FAX (for Supported Models)].

  • The machine name displayed on this screen varies depending on the model of your machine.


  • When you share the printer with Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/7/Sever 2008, select [Use as Sheared Printer]. If necessary, you can change the name of Shared printer. If you want to set the operating system on which driver will run, click [Driver to add] to install an alternate driver so that the driver can be installed on a client pc via a network.
  • The machine name displayed on this screen vary depending on the model of your machine.

  • The machine name displayed on this screen varies depending on the model of your machine.


  • The machine name displayed on this screen varies depending on the model of your machine.



  • The machine name displayed on this screen varies depending on the model of your machine.

A printer test page is printed out from the machine.

  • The machine name displayed on this screen varies depending on the model of your machine.




Remove the User Software CD-ROM. Installation is complete.

  • If you have several computers that you want to connect to the machine through a network, repeat the procedure from step 1 for each computer.

  • Color Network ScanGear Installation


Insert the User Software CD-ROM.

If the CD-ROM Setup screen is not displayed, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [My Computer].
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008: click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Computer].
Windows 2000: double-click [My Computer] on the Windows desktop.
Right-click on the CD-ROM icon and select [Open], then double-click [MInst] ([MInst.exe]).

  • To install the Color Network ScanGear on Windows Server 2008, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Computer] → right-click on the CD-ROM icon and select [Open], → [Color_Network_ScanGear] → [Driver] → double-click [SetUp] ([Setup.exe]), then proceed to step 4.


Select the same language as your operating system.

  • If you selected a language that is not same as your operating system, the characters may be garbled.






  • The Readme file opens. After reading it, close the window.



  • Remove the User Software CD-ROM. Installation is complete.

  • Check Installation

Verify that the driver has been installed successfully and that the machine has been set as the default printer.

  • If the name of the machine is selected on the [Printer] screen from an application, it is set as the default printer.

  1. Open the [Printers and Faxes] folder (for Windows 2000: The [Printers] dialog box).

Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Devices and Printers]
Windows XP/Server 2003: From the Windows task bar, click [start] → select [Printers and Faxes].
Windows Server 2008: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Control Panel] → double-click [Printers].
Windows Vista: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → double-click [Printers].
Windows 2000: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → double-click [Printers].

Verify that the corresponding printer driver icon is displayed.


  1. Set your machine as the default printer.

Select the printer icon for this machine, then select [Set as Default Printer] from the [File] menu.


  1. Verify that [Color Network ScanGear] is displayed in the program list.

Windows XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008: From the Windows task bar, click [start] on the Windows task bar →select [All Programs].
Windows 2000: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] →[Programs].

Verify that the [Color Network ScanGear] is listed in [All Programs] (or [Programs]).



USB Connection

Return to Overview


Remark
  • Windows Server 2003 and Windows Server 2008 are not supported.
  • The following procedures are explained using sample screens from Windows XP Professional.
  • The screen may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  • Do not connect the USB cable before installing the software. If you connect the USB cable before installing the software and the [Found New Hardware Wizard] screen appears, click [Cancel].
  • Log on as an Administrator to install the software.
  • Make sure the machine is turned ON before connecting the USB cable.
  • Click on the circled button on each screen to proceed to the next step.
  • A USB cable is not included with the machine.

  • MF Driver & MF Toolbox Installation


Insert the User Software CD-ROM.

If the CD-ROM Setup screen is not displayed, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [My Computer].
Windows Vista/7: click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Computer].
Windows 2000: double-click [My Computer] on the Windows desktop.
Right-click on the CD-ROM icon and select [Open], then double-click [MInst] ([MInst.exe]).



While installing the software on a computer running Windows Server 2003, the display in this step does not appear.











After checking [Restart Computer Now (recommended)] button, you can restart your computer by clicking the [Restart] button.



The machine has a cap (A) that covers the USB port on the back of the machine. Remove the cap (A) by pulling the string.

After restarting your computer, connect the machine and your computer with a USB cable (A).

  • Depending on the operation system you use, the dialog box to inform you that new hardware is detected may appear. Follow the on-screen instruction to complete the installation.


Remove the User Software CD-ROM. Installation is complete.


  • Check Installation

Verify that the driver has been installed successfully and that the machine has been set as the default printer.

  • If the name of the machine is selected on the [Printer] screen from an application, it is set as the default printer.

  1. Open the [Printers and Faxes] folder (for Windows 2000: The [Printers] dialog box).

Windows 7: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Devices and Printers].
Windows XP: From the Windows task bar, click [start] → select [Printers and Faxes].
Windows Vista: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → double-click [Printers].
Windows 2000: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → double-click [Printers].

Verify that the corresponding printer driver icon is displayed.


  1. Set your machine as the default printer.

Select the printer icon for this machine, then select [Set as Default Printer] from the [File] menu.


  1. Open the [Scanners and Cameras] folder (for Windows 2000: The [Scanners and Cameras Properties] dialog box).

Windows 7: Enter "scanner" in [Search programs and files] under the [Start] menu → click [View scanners and cameras].
Windows XP: From the Windows task bar, click [start] → select [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Scanners and Cameras].
Windows Vista: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → double-click [Scanners and Cameras].
Windows 2000: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → double-click [Scanners and Cameras].

Verify that the corresponding scanner driver icon is displayed.


  1. Verify that there is the [Canon MF Toolbox 4.9] icon on the Windows desktop.

If the [Canon MF Toolbox 4.9] icon is displayed on the Windows desktop, installation of the MF Toolbox 4.9 was successful.



How to Use This Manual

This category describes how to use this manual.



User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual)

The User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual) is software that enables you to select and view HTML Manuals included on the CD-ROM via your computer screen. Follow the instructions below to use the User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual).


System Requirements

Using the User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual)

Symbols Used in This Manual

Abbreviations Used in This Manual

Illustrations Used in This Manual

Legal Notices


System Requirements

Return to Overview

The User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual) can be used in the following system environments.

  • OS (Operating System)
  • Windows 2000 SP4, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7
    (Internet Explorer 6 is required if you are using Windows 2000 SP4.)
  • Mac OS X v10.4.x, v10.5.x
  • Web Browser
  • Windows: Internet Explorer 6, 7, 8
  • Mac: Safari 2, 3, 4
  • Flash Player
  • Flash Player 8.0 or later

Remark
  • The memory and CPU required to run each operating system are also required.
  • A display resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels or higher is required.
  • The User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual) may not operate correctly if Flash Player is not installed or a version of Flash Player earlier than Flash Player 8.0 is installed in your computer.


Using the User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual)

Return to Overview

  • When using the e-Manual with Windows, follow the steps below.
  • Install the e-Manual on your computer.

1. Insert the User Manual CD-ROM on your computer.
2. Select the language.
3. Click [Install] button.
4. The installation starts automatically.
5. When the installation finished, press [OK].
6. To display the e-Manual, double-click the short cut icon [MF4380_Manual_us] on the desktop.

  • Display the e-Manual directly from the CD-ROM.

1. Insert the User Manual CD-ROM on your computer.
2. Select the language.
3. To display the e-Manual, click [Display manual].

  • When using the e-Manual with Macintosh, follow the steps below.

1. Insert the User Manual CD-ROM in your computer.
2. Drag-and-drop the [MF4380_Manual_us] folder into the location you want to save it.
3. Open the [MF4380_Manual_us] folder.
4. Double click index.html, and the e-Manual is displayed.

When you start the e-Manual, the screen below is displayed.



1 [Top]
Click to return to the top page.
2 [Function List]
Click to display the topic pages for function categories.
3 [Contents]
Click to display the topic pages for Contents.
4 [Index]
Click to display the topic pages for Index.
5 [Glossary]
Click to display the glossary in a separate window.
6 [Search]
Click to display a list of the topic page titles that include the phrase you enter. Click a title to display the corresponding topic page.
7 [Print]
Click to print all categories or a single category.
8 Function Categories
Select a function category to display a list of image icons for the topics corresponding to that function. Click an image icon or [Display Function List] to display the topic pages for the function category.
9 Appendix Categories
Select an appendix category to display the topic pages not related to functions, such as the maintenance and troubleshooting topics.
10 [Office Locations]
Click to display Canon contact details in a separate window.

Remark
  • If the menu is not displayed automatically after you insert the CD-ROM, follow the procedure below.
    Windows XP: click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [My Computer].
    Windows Vista/7: click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Computer].
    Windows 2000: double-click [My Computer] on the Windows desktop.
    Right-click on the CD-ROM icon and select [Open], then double-click start.exe.
  • Depending on the operating system you are using, a security protection message may be displayed. In this case, allow the contents to be displayed.
  • If you are using a browser such as Internet Explorer for Windows XP, ActiveX blocks pop-ups in the background. If the e-Manual is not displayed properly, look for an information bar at the top of the page and click the information bar.
  • When performing a search, make sure to enter a phrase that will match a keyword. Depending on the phrase you enter, the correct search results may not be displayed.
  • Topic pages can be printed by page or by category.
  • The background color and images of the Topic Page may not be printed, depending on the web browser settings.


Symbols Used in This Manual

Return to Overview

The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions, handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.

  • Indicates a warning or a caution concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons, or damage to property if not performed correctly. To use this machine safely, always pay attention to these warnings and cautions.
  • Explains operating restrictions and how to avoid minor difficulties.
  • Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual
  • The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be pressed are expressed in this manual.
  • Operation Panel Keys: <Key icon> + [Key name]
    Example: [Stop/Reset].
  • Buttons on the computer operation screen: [Button name]
    Example: [OK]
  • Information in the display appears in angle brackets: <LOAD PAPER>.


Abbreviations Used in This Manual

Return to Overview

In this manual, product names and model names are abbreviated as follows:

Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system : Windows 2000

Microsoft Windows XP operating system : Windows XP

Microsoft Windows Vista operating system : Windows Vista

Microsoft Windows 7 operating system : Windows 7

Microsoft Windows Server 2003 operating system : Windows Server 2003

Microsoft Windows Server 2008 operating system : Windows Server 2008

Microsoft Windows operating system : Windows



Illustrations Used in This Manual

Return to Overview

Illustrations used in this manual are the model MF4370dn. When there is any difference among MF4380dn, MF4370dn, and MF4350d, it is clearly indicated in the text, e.g., "For MF4370dn."
For information on the standard features for each model, see "Available Features." The display used in this manual is the factory preset display for the MF4370dn in default setting. Depending on the system configuration and product purchased, the appearance of the display may differ.




Legal Notices

Return to Overview

  • Trademarks

Canon, the Canon logo, imageCLASS, and NetSpot are trademarks of Canon Inc. Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server and Windows Vista are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

  • Copyright

Copyright © 2009 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Canon Inc.

  • Disclaimers

The information in this document is subject to change without notice.

CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.



Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Instructions



Error Codes

An error code is a four-digit code shown on an ERROR TX REPORT or an RX REPORT when an error occurs.

For details on reports, see "Summary of Reports and Lists."

See the table below for individual error codes.


00A0

00A1

00FF

0001

0070

0071

0080

008D

00A0

Description

Transmission was manually canceled on the machine.

Action

Resend the document if necessary.

00A1

Description

There is a document jam.

Action

Clear the document jam.

00FF

Description

All redialing attempts have failed.

Action

Check if the recipient's number is correct or the telephone cable is properly connected, and try again.

0001

Description

The sender may not be using a G3 fax machine.

Action

Make sure the sender's machine is compatible with your machine.

0070

Description

Reception was manually canceled on the machine.

Action

Ask the sender to resend the document if necessary.

0071

Description

The machine's memory is full.

Action

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

0080

Description

The recipient's machine did not respond within 35 seconds.

Action

Resend the document. Ask the other party to check their machine. If you are making an overseas call, add a pause to the number.

008D

Description

The recipient's machine has run out of paper.

Action

Ask the recipient to make sure that paper is loaded in their machine.



If a Power Failure Occurs

If a power failure occurs, you cannot copy, scan, or print documents.

  • For fax operations in a power failure
  • You cannot send and receive documents.
  • Depending on your telephone, you may not be able to make telephone calls.
  • You can receive telephone calls from the telephone connected to the machine.

Even if power is suddenly lost due to a power failure or accidental unplugging, any sent or received documents stored in memory are backed up for about 5 minutes. However, after this period of time, the machine may lose any data stored in the memory. If this happens, the display shows <LOST IMAGE> when power is restored and automatically prints a Lost Report (unless the cartridge is empty or there is no paper in the machine) that lists the documents (received in the last 60 transactions) that were lost from memory as a result of the power cut.



If You Cannot Solve a Problem

This section describes the customer support services.


Customer Support (U.S.A.)

Customer Support (Canada)


Customer Support (U.S.A.)

Return to Overview


If you cannot solve the problem after having referred to the information in this chapter, contact Canon Customer Care Center at 1-800-OK-CANON Monday through Friday between the hours of 8:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. EST. On-line support is also available 24 hours a day at the website http://www.canontechsupport.com.



Customer Support (Canada)

Return to Overview


Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical support options*:
* Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.

  • For step-by-step troubleshooting, e-mail technical support, the latest driver or document downloads, and answers to frequently asked questions, visit
    http://www.canon.ca/
  • Free live technical support 9 A.M. to 8 P.M. EST Monday through Friday (excluding holidays) for products still under warranty 1-800-652-2666
  • For the location of the authorized service facility nearest you, visit http://www.canon.ca/ or 1-800-652-2666
  • If the problem cannot be corrected by using one of the above technical support options, repair options are available at the time of your call to the live technical support number above or via the website at http://www.canon.ca/
    * Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.

Please have the following information ready when you contact Canon:

  • Product name (imageCLASS MF4380dn/imageCLASS MF4370dn/imageCLASS MF4350d)
  • Serial number (on the label located inside top of the front cover)
  • Place of purchase
  • Nature of problem
  • Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results

Remark
  • If the machine makes strange noises, emits smoke or odd odor, turn OFF the main power switch immediately, disconnect the power cord, and contact Canon Customer Care Center. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the machine yourself.
  • Attempting to repair the machine yourself may void the limited warranty.


Clearing Jams

When <CHECK DOCUMENT>, <PAPER JAM> or <PAPER JAM/OPEN REAR COVER> appears on the display, remove jammed paper from the machine first, then from the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray if necessary. Check the following if you experience repeated paper jams:

  • Fan and tap the paper stack on a flat surface before loading it in the machine.
  • Check that the paper you are using meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")
  • Make sure you have removed any scraps of paper from the inside of the machine.

Remark
  • When removing jammed documents or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the document or paper.
  • When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
  • If you tear the paper, remove any torn pieces to avoid further jams.
  • If loose toner comes into contact with your skin or clothing, wash with cold water. Warm water will set the toner.
  • Do not force a jammed document or paper out of the machine. Contact Canon Customer Care Center if needed.

Document Jams

For MF4380dn


For MF4370dn/MF4350d


Paper Jams

For MF4380dn/MF4370dn


For MF4350d



Document Jams

Return to Overview

When <CHECK DOCUMENT> appears on the display, remove a jammed document from the ADF.



For MF4380dn

Return to Overview

When <CHECK DOCUMENT> appears on the display, remove a jammed document from the ADF.

  1. Open the ADF cover.
  1. Hold both sides of any jammed documents and gently pull them out straight upward.
  • Do not force a jammed document out of the machine. If the jammed document cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
  1. Open the inner cover, holding it by its front tab (A).
  1. Lift the release lever (A) until it clicks into place.
  1. Remove the jammed document.
  • Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine as it may tear.
  1. Return the release lever (A) to its original position.
  1. Close the inner cover.
  1. Close the ADF cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  1. Open the ADF and then hold both sides of any jammed documents and gently pull them out.
  1. Close the ADF.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.


For MF4370dn/MF4350d

Return to Overview

  1. Open the ADF cover.
  1. Hold both sides of any jammed documents and gently pull them out straight upward.
  • Do not pull the document forcefully as it may tear.
  1. Hold both sides of any jammed documents and gently pull them out.
  1. Close the ADF cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  1. Open the ADF and then hold both sides of any jammed documents and gently pull them out.
  1. Close the ADF.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.


Paper Jams

Return to Overview

When <PAPER JAM> or <PAPER JAM/OPEN REAR COVER> appears on the display, remove jammed paper from the inside of the machine first, then from the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray if necessary.



For MF4380dn/MF4370dn

Return to Overview

  1. Hold the front side of the operation panel with your hands.
  1. Lift the scanning platform (A) until it is locked. (You will hear an audible "click.")
  1. Hold the grip (A) on the right front side of the toner cover.
  1. Open the toner cover.
  1. Remove the toner cartridge from the machine.
  • Do not touch the rollers and parts which have labels "CAUTION! Hot surface avoid contact" on. They become very hot during use.
  • Remove watches and any bracelets or rings when touching the inside of the machine. These items might be damaged if they come into contact with the parts inside of the machine.
  • To avoid exposing the toner cartridge to light, place it in its protective bag or wrap it in a thick cloth.
  • Do not open the drum protective shutter on the toner cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.
  • Do not touch the fixing assembly (A) as it becomes very hot during use.
  • Do not touch the transfer roller (B) as this can damage the machine.

  • Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle (A).

  1. Hold both sides of the jammed paper and gently pull it out.
  1. Gently pull the jammed paper between the fixing assembly (A) and transfer roller (B) until the leading edge emerges from the machine.
  • Do not touch the fixing assembly (A) as it becomes very hot during use.
  • Do not touch the transfer roller (B) as this can damage the machine.
  1. Hold both sides of the jammed paper and carefully pull it out.
  1. Hold the toner cartridge by its handle (A).
  • Do not open the drum protective shutter on the toner cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.
  • Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle.
  1. Insert the toner cartridge so that the protrusion on the right side of the toner cartridge (A) fits into the guide (B) located on the right side of the machine and slide it down parallel to the guide.
  1. Push down the toner cartridge to make sure it is properly set in the machine.
  1. Hold the grip (A) on the right front side of the toner cover.
  1. Close the toner cover.
  1. Lower the scanning platform.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  • If you cannot close the toner cover, do not force it to close. Open the cover and make sure the toner cartridge is properly set in the machine.
  1. Remove the dust cover from the paper cassette.
  1. Open the front panel of the paper cassette.
  1. Remove the paper in the paper cassette.
  1. Hold both sides of the jammed paper and slowly pull it out in the direction of the arrow.

  • When feeding paper from the paper cassette:


  • When feeding paper from the multi-purpose tray:

  1. Load the paper into the paper cassette.
  1. Close the front panel of the paper cassette.
  1. Set the dust cover on the paper cassette.
  1. Open the rear cover.

This operation is required only when <OPEN REAR COVER> appears on the display.

  1. Hold both sides of the jammed paper and gently pull it out upward.
  • This operation is required only when <OPEN REAR COVER> appears on the display.
  • If the jammed paper is badly folded, similar to the folds of an accordion, ease the jammed paper loose and then pull it out from the machine.

  1. Close the rear cover.

This operation is required only when <OPEN REAR COVER> appears on the display.

  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  • To reset the machine, open the toner cover and then close it.


For MF4350d

Return to Overview

  1. Remove the dust cover from the paper feeding tray.
  1. Remove the paper in the paper feeding tray.
  1. Open the rear cover.

This operation is required only when <PAPER JAM/OPEN REAR COVER> appears on the display.

  1. Lift the scanning platform until it is locked (A), and open the printer cover (B).
  1. Remove the toner cartridge from the machine.
  • Remove watches and any bracelets or rings when touching the inside of the machine. These items might be damaged if they come into contact with the parts inside of the machine.
  • To avoid exposing the toner cartridge to light, place it in its protective bag or wrap it in a thick cloth.
  • Do not open the drum protective shutter on the toner cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.
  • Do not touch the fixing assembly (A) as it becomes very hot during use.
  • Do not touch the transfer roller (B) as this can damage the machine.

  • Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle (A).

  1. Hold both sides of the jammed paper and gently pull it out.
  1. Gently pull the jammed paper between the fixing assembly (A) and transfer roller (B) until the leading edge emerges from the machine.
  • Do not touch the fixing assembly (A) as it becomes very hot during use.
  • Do not touch the transfer roller (B) as this can damage the machine.
  1. Hold both sides of the jammed paper and carefully pull it out.
  1. Hold both sides of the jammed paper and gently pull it out upward.
  • This operation is required only when <PAPER JAM/OPEN REAR COVER> appears on the display.
  • If the jammed paper is badly folded, similar to the folds of an accordion, ease the jammed paper loose and then pull it out from the machine.

  1. Hold both sides of the jammed paper and slowly pull it out in the direction of the arrow.

  • When feeding paper from the paper feeding tray:


  • When feeding paper from the multi-purpose tray:

  1. Hold the toner cartridge by its handle.

The arrow (A) on the toner cartridge should be facing away from you and pointing down.

  • Do not open the drum protective shutter on the toner cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.
  1. Insert the toner cartridge into the machine as far as it will go.

Align the guide (A) on the left side of the toner cartridge with the groove inside the machine.

  1. Push down the toner cartridge to make sure it is properly set in the machine.
  1. Close the printer cover and lower the scanning platform.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  • To reset the machine, open the toner cover and then close it.
  1. Close the rear cover.

This operation is required only when <PAPER JAM/OPEN REAR COVER> appears on the display.

  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  • To reset the machine, open the toner cover and then close it.
  1. Load the paper into the paper feeding tray.
  1. Set the dust cover on the paper feeding tray.
  • After all the procedures are completed, the machine should be ready for operating. If the machine returns to the standby mode, troubleshooting has been successful. If the machine does not return to the standby mode, check if jammed paper is still left in the machine.


If <LOAD CORRECT PAPER> is displayed

When <LOAD CORRECT PAPER> appears on the display, the size of the paper in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray is different from that of the paper specified in <PAPER SIZE> for <CASSETTE> or <MP TRAY>. You need to load the correct size paper or change the paper size in <PAPER SIZE> for <CASSETTE> or <MP TRAY>.


Remark
  • For print jobs, you need to specify the paper size from your computer.

Reloading the Paper

Changing the Paper Size Setting


Reloading the Paper

Return to Overview

  1. Load the correct size paper as shown on the display, then press [OK] to resume the job.

The machine re-starts printing.



Changing the Paper Size Setting

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to change the paper size setting.

  1. Press [Paper Settings] repeatedly to select <CASSETTE> or <MP TRAY>, then press [OK].
  • If <LOAD CORRECT PAPER> appears during a copy job, you cannot access the paper size setting through [Paper Settings]. In this case, cancel the job first, then press [Paper Settings] and change the paper size setting. For how to cancel copy jobs, see "Canceling Copy Jobs."
  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper size same as paper loaded into the machine, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  • Now ready to copy your document.
  • For a fax job or report printing, go to the next step.
  1. Press [OK] to resume the job.

No further operation is required.



Display Messages

Display Messages <A to E>

Display Messages <F to J>

Display Messages <K to O>

Display Messages <P to Z>


Display Messages <A to E>

Return to Overview


AVAILABLE MEMORY
nn%

CANNOT PRINT RX DATA

CHANGE REG'D SIZE
→ PAPER SETTINGS

CHECK DOCUMENT

CLOSE COVER
TONER COVER

AVAILABLE MEMORY
nn%

Description

This message shows the percentage of the memory currently available.

Action

If you need more space, wait for the machine to send any documents in memory. Also print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

CANNOT PRINT RX DATA

Description

The machine temporarily received the fax in memory because an error of some kind has occurred in the machine.
This error message appears with one of the messages below.

  • <CLOSE COVER/TONER COVER>
  • <LOAD CORRECT PAPER>
  • <REMOVE MP PAPER>
  • <CHANGE REG'D SIZE/ → PAPER SETTINGS>
  • <OUT OF TONER/CHANGE TONER>
  • <SET PAPER AGAIN/SET TONER AGAIN>
  • <PAPER JAM>
  • <PAPER JAM/OPEN REAR COVER>
  • <LOAD PAPER>
Action

This error message appears with another message. When the error is resolved, the received data will be printed out. For how to solve the problem, see the action for the messages displayed with it.

CHANGE REG'D SIZE
→ PAPER SETTINGS

Description

The paper size is not appropriate for your print jobs.

Action
  • To print reports or received data, set the <CASSETTE> paper size to <LTR>, <LGL>, <A4>, <B5>, <OFICIO>, <BRAZIL- OFICIO>, <MEXICO-OFICIO>, <GOVERNMENT-LETTER>, <GOVERNMENT-LEGAL>, or <FOOLSCAP>. For details, see "Setting Paper Size and Type."
  • To print received data on both sides of paper, set the <CASSETTE> paper size to <LTR> or <A4>. For details, see "Setting Paper Size and Type."

CHECK DOCUMENT

Description

A document jam may have occurred in the ADF.

Action

Remove the jammed document.

CLOSE COVER
TONER COVER

Description

The toner cover is not closed completely.

Action

Check the toner cover, and make sure that it is completely closed.



Display Messages <F to J>

Return to Overview


HANG UP PHONE

HANG UP PHONE

Description

The external telephone is off the hook.

Action

Hang up the external telephone.



Display Messages <K to O>

Return to Overview


LIFT PANEL TO OPEN
OPEN TONER COVER

LOAD CORRECT PAPER

LOAD PAPER

LOST IMAGE

MEMORY FULL

NOT AVAILABLE

NOT REGISTERED

OUT OF TONER
CHANGE TONER

LIFT PANEL TO OPEN
OPEN TONER COVER

Description

Appears alternately with other messages.

Action

Varies by the message that appears. For details, see the explanation for the message (i.e., <SET PAPER AGAIN/SET TONER AGAIN>).

LOAD CORRECT PAPER

Description

The size of the paper in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray is different from that of the paper specified in <PAPER SIZE> for <CASSETTE> or <MP TRAY>.

Action

Load the correct size paper or change the paper size in <PAPER SIZE> for <CASSETTE> or <MP TRAY>. For details, see "If <LOAD CORRECT PAPER> is displayed."

LOAD PAPER

Description1

No paper is loaded in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray when copying or printing.

Action

Load paper correctly. Then press [OK] when using the paper cassette.

Description2

No paper is loaded in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray when printing a received document.
Or, when printing a report or list, this message appears if the paper size is not appropriate for printing a report or list even if paper is loaded. This error message appears with one of the messages below.
<CHANGE REG'D SIZE/→PAPER SETTINGS>
<CANNOT PRINT RX DATA>

Action

Load paper correctly. Then press [OK] when using the paper cassette.
For report or list, set the paper size to <LTR>, <LGL>, <A4>, <B5>, <OFICIO>, <BRAZIL- OFICIO>, <MEXICO- OFICIO>, <GOVERNMENT-LETTER>, <GOVERNMENT-LEGAL>, or <FOOLSCAP>, and then load paper of the same size.

LOST IMAGE

Description

The machine was turned OFF with documents stored in the machine's memory.
Please note that any data stored in the memory, including received fax documents, will be deleted if you leave the machine turned OFF for about 5 minutes.

Action

The error is automatically released after two seconds, and the machine automatically prints out the lost report that shows the records still existing in the activity report.

MEMORY FULL

Description1

The machine is full of jobs.

Action1

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

Action2

Divide the document stack or data into a few parts and try again one by one.

Action3

Send the document with low resolution.

Description2

The number of TX/RX jobs that can be stored in memory reached the maximum.

Action

The machine memory can store up to 256 fax jobs including sending and receiving jobs. (Based on the condition that the other party sends the fax by the imageCLASS 4380dn with ITU-T Standard Chart No.1, standard mode.)
Wait for the machine to send any faxes in memory. Also print or delete any documents in memory.

NOT AVAILABLE

Description1

You pressed the one-touch key that has already been registered, when you are registering group dialing.

Description2

You selected the group dialing that has already been registered, when you are registering a one-touch key.

Action

Register the one-touch key that is not used.

NOT REGISTERED

Description

No recipient is registered for the one-touch key or coded dial code you pressed.

Action

Register the recipients before using the Address Book function.

OUT OF TONER
CHANGE TONER

Description

The toner ran out completely.

Action

Replace the toner cartridge.



Display Messages <P to Z>

Return to Overview


PAPER JAM

PAPER JAM
OPEN REAR COVER

PLEASE WAIT

REMOVE MP PAPER

SET PAPER AGAIN
SET TONER AGAIN

SYSTEM ERROR
EXXX

WRONG PASSWORD

PAPER JAM

Description

Paper jams have occurred in the machine. <LIFT PANEL TO OPEN/OPEN TONER COVER> appears alternately.

Action

Clear the paper jam (See "Paper Jams.") and reload paper in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray. The cover must be opened and closed to resume the current job.

PAPER JAM
OPEN REAR COVER

Description

Paper jams have occurred in the machine. <LIFT PANEL TO OPEN/OPEN TONER COVER> appears alternately.

Action

Clear the paper jam (See "Paper Jams.") and reload paper in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray. The cover must be opened and closed to resume the current job.

PLEASE WAIT

Description

This message appears when turning on the main power switch, or when the machine is not ready for printing.

Action

Wait until the message disappears.

REMOVE MP PAPER

Description

Paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray.

Action

Remove the paper from the multi-purpose tray. The machine will not print faxes, reports, or lists when paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray. They will be stored in memory.

SET PAPER AGAIN
SET TONER AGAIN

Description

Paper is not loaded properly, or the toner cartridge is not set.

Action

Load paper properly. (For instructions on how to load paper in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray, see "Loading Paper.")
Set the toner cartridge in the machine (see "Install Toner Cartridge.")

SYSTEM ERROR
EXXX

Description

A system error has occurred. <XXX> will be a three-digit code that indicates a particular type of error.

Action

Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for more than 5 seconds, then turn it ON again. If the message persists, turn OFF the main power switch, disconnect the power cord, and contact Canon Customer Care Center.

WRONG PASSWORD

Description

The memory lock reception password or system password you entered is incorrect.

Action

Enter the correct password. For details, see "Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception) (Fax)," or "Specifying the System Manager Settings."



Troubleshooting

General Problems

Paper Feeding Problems

Fax Problems

Sending Problems


Receiving Problems


Copying Problems

Printing Problems

Scanning Problems

Telephone Problems

Network Problems

Installing and Uninstalling Problems


General Problems

Return to Overview


The machine has no power.

The Error indicator blinks.

Nothing appears on the display.

The machine has no power.

Is the power cord plugged in securely?

Check that the power cord is securely plugged into the machine and into the wall outlet. If the machine is plugged into a power strip, make sure the power strip is plugged in and turned on.

Is the power cord supplying power?

Use a different power cord, or test the cord for continuity using a voltmeter.

Is the main power switch turned ON?

Turn ON the main power switch.

The Error indicator blinks.

Does the machine feed paper correctly, or is there paper in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray?

Clear the paper jam, or load paper in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray. (For instructions on clearing paper jam, see "Clearing Jams." For instructions on loading paper, see "Loading Paper.)

If the machine has no paper jam, or paper is loaded in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray, turn OFF the main power switch and wait for more than 10 seconds, then turn it ON again. If the problem is fixed, the Error indicator will turn OFF, and the display will return to the standby mode. If the Error indicator remains blinking, unplug the machine, and contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities or the Canon Customer Care Center.

Nothing appears on the display.

Is the power cord plugged in securely?

Check that the power cord is securely plugged into the machine and into the wall outlet. If the machine is plugged into a power strip, make sure the power strip is plugged in and turned on.

Is the main power switch turned ON?

Turn ON the main power switch.

Is the machine in Sleep mode?

Press [Energy Saver] on the operation panel to cancel the Sleep mode.



Paper Feeding Problems

Return to Overview


Paper does not feed properly.

Multiple sheets feed together into the machine.

Repeated paper jams occur.

Paper does not feed properly.

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded. (See "Loading Paper.")

Does the machine contain too many sheets?

Make sure you load the correct quantity. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Multiple sheets feed together into the machine.

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded. (See "Loading Paper.")

Does the machine contain too many sheets?

Make sure you load the correct quantity. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Are different types of paper loaded in the machine?

Load only one type of paper.

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Let the paper run out before refilling the machine. Avoid mixing new stock with the paper already loaded.

Repeated paper jams occur.

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")



Fax Problems

Return to Overview


Sending Problems

Receiving Problems


Sending Problems

Return to Overview


Cannot send a fax.

Memory fills up immediately when you try to send.

Faxes sent from the machine are spotted or dirty.

The documents you sent are too light.

Sending of documents is too slow.

Errors occur frequently while sending.

Cannot redial with [Redial/Pause].

Cannot send a fax.

Did you just turn ON the main power switch?

Wait for a while. After turning ON the main power switch, the machine cannot scan documents immediately.

Is the machine set for the correct telephone line type?

Make sure the machine is set for the correct telephone line type. (See "Setting the Type of Telephone Line (Fax).")

Is your machine in the fax mode?

Press [FAX] to show the fax standby display.

Is the document loaded correctly?

Make sure the document is correctly loaded. (See "Placing Documents.")

Make sure the scanning platform and rear cover are fully closed. (See "Paper Jams.")

Is the one-touch key or coded dial code you entered registered correctly?

Check that the Address Book settings are registered correctly. (See "Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys," and "Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes.")

Did you dial the correct number?

Check that you have the correct number.

Is the machine in the Sleep mode?

The machine does not scan documents if it is in the Sleep mode. To take the machine out of the Sleep mode, press [Energy Saver] on the operation panel.

Is the recipient's machine out of paper?

Ask the recipient to make sure paper is loaded in the machine.

Are there other documents being sent from memory?

Allow time for the documents to finish sending.

Has an error occurred during transmission?

Check the display for an error message. (See "Display Messages.")

Print an Activity Report and check for an error. (See "Activity Report.")

Is the telephone cable connected properly?

Make sure the cable is connected properly. (See "Connect Telephone Cables.")

Is the telephone line working properly?

Make sure there is a dial tone when you press [Hook] or when you lift the handset of any external telephone connected to the machine. If there is no dial tone, contact your local telephone company.

Is the recipient's machine a G3 fax machine?

Make sure the recipient's machine is compatible with your machine.

Did the recipient's machine answer within 35 seconds (after all automatic redialing attempts)?

Ask the recipient to check the machine. For an overseas call, add pauses to the registered number. (See "Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses) (Fax).")

Is the Processing/Data indicator lit?

The external phone is busy. Please wait until the external phone becomes free.

Is the machine overheated?

Unplug the machine and let it cool for about 5 minutes. Then plug in the machine and try sending again.

Memory fills up immediately when you try to send.

Are you sending with the resolution set to <SUPER FINE>?

If you want to keep your document quality, divide the document into some parts and send them separately.

If your document does not contain fine text or photographs, set the resolution to <STANDARD>.

If your document contains fine text or photographs, send it directly rather than using a memory transmission.

Is a document stored in memory, leaving little memory available?

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

Faxes sent from the machine are spotted or dirty.

Is the recipient's machine working properly?

Check the machine by making a copy. If the copy is clear, the problem may be in the recipient's machine. If the copy is spotted or dirty, clean the scanner components. (See "Scanning Area.")

Is the document loaded correctly?

Make sure the document is correctly loaded. (See "Placing Documents.")

The documents you sent are too light.

Is the density setting changed to be lighter?

Adjust the density for light documents to be darker. (See "Adjusting Density (Fax).")

Are the scanning components of the machine clean?

If the received document is spotted or dirty, clean the scanning components. (See "Scanning Area.")

Sending of documents is too slow.

Is the resolution set to <FINE>, <PHOTO>, or <SUPER FINE>?

Setting the resolution to <STANDARD> reduces the sending time.

Errors occur frequently while sending.

Are the telephone lines in poor condition, or do you have a bad connection?

Check if there is a device nearby that interferes with signal transmission (e.g., microwave oven).

Cannot redial with [Redial/Pause].

Is <RESTRICT REDIAL> set to <ON>?

When <RESTRICT REDIAL> is set to <ON>, Redialing is not available. (See "Restricting Redial.")

Entering the fax number is required again after pressing [Start].

Is <CONFIRM FAX NO.> set to <ON>?

When <CONFIRM FAX NO.> is set to <ON>, you need to enter the fax number again after pressing [Start]. (See "Confirming Entered Fax Numbers.")



Receiving Problems

Return to Overview


Cannot receive a fax automatically.

No automatic switching between telephone and fax calls.

Cannot receive a document manually.

Print quality is poor.

Faxes do not print.

Received faxes print blotched or unevenly.

Part of the document you receive is cut off.

Receiving of documents is too slow.

Cannot get documents from information services.

Errors occur frequently while receiving.

Cannot print received documents on both sides of the paper.

Cannot receive a fax automatically.

Is the machine set to receive automatically?

For the machine to receive faxes automatically, the receive mode must be set to <FaxOnly>, <FAX/TEL>, <AnsMode>, or <DRPD>. If you have set <AnsMode>, confirm that an external telephone with built in answering machine is connected to the machine and that it is turned on with an outgoing message properly recorded. (See "Selecting the Receive Mode (Fax).")

Are documents stored in memory, leaving little or no memory available?

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

Has an error occurred during reception?

Check the display for an error message. (See "Display Messages.")

Print an Activity Report and check for an error. (See "Activity Report.")

Is paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure paper is loaded in the machine. (See "Loading Paper.")

Is the telephone cable connected properly?

Make sure the cable is connected properly. (See "Connect Telephone Cables.")

No automatic switching between telephone and fax calls.

Is the machine set to switch automatically between telephone and fax calls?

For the machine to switch between fax and telephone calls automatically, the receive mode must be set to <FAX/TEL>, <AnsMode>, or <DRPD>. If you have set <AnsMode>, confirm that external telephone with built in answering machine is connected to the machine and that it is turned on with an outgoing message properly recorded. (See "Selecting the Receive Mode (Fax).")

Are documents stored in memory, leaving little or no memory available?

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

Has an error occurred during reception?

Check the display for an error message. (See "Display Messages.")

Print an Activity Report and check for an error. (See "Activity Report.")

Is paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded. (See "Loading Paper.")

Can the sender's machine send the CNG signal, which tells your machine that the incoming call is a fax call?

Some machines cannot send this signal. In such cases, receive the fax manually.

Cannot receive a document manually.

Is the machine set to receive manually?

For the machine to receive faxes manually, the receive mode must be set to <Manual>. (See "Selecting the Receive Mode (Fax).")

Did you hang up the external telephone before pressing [Start] or dialing the remote reception ID?

Always press (Start) or dial the remote reception ID before hanging up. Otherwise you will disconnect the call.

Print quality is poor.

Is the toner low or unevenly distributed?

Redistribute the toner inside the toner cartridge. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Is the sender's machine functioning properly?

Ask the sender to check that the scanning components of the machine are clean.

Is the machine in the toner saver mode?

Set <TONER SAVER MODE> to <OFF>. (See "Setting the Toner Save Mode.")

Faxes do not print.

Have you removed the plastic seal from the toner cartridge?

Make sure you remove the seal from the cartridge. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")

Is the toner cartridge installed properly?

Make sure the toner cartridge is installed properly. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")

Is the cartridge out of toner?

Replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

Is the correct size of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Change <PAPER SIZE>. (See "Setting Paper Size and Type.")

Received faxes print blotched or unevenly.

Is the sender's machine functioning properly?

Ask the sender to check that the scanning components of the machine are clean.

Is the toner low or unevenly distributed?

Redistribute the toner inside the toner cartridge. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

Part of the document you receive is cut off.

Are the slide guides of the paper cassette set to the size of the paper?

Adjust the guides of the paper cassette to the size of the paper.

Have you specified the correct paper size for the paper cassette?

Specify the correct paper size for the paper cassette.

Is the toner low or unevenly distributed?

Redistribute the toner inside the toner cartridge. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

Is the printing method for received documents set to <CUT>?

If you want to print a received document without cutting off the end, set the printing method to <ON> or <OFF>. (See "Reducing a Received Document (Fax).")

Receiving of documents is too slow.

Is the resolution of the sender's machine set higher?

Contact to the sender and make sure the resolution of the sender's machine has been set properly.

Cannot get documents from information services.

Is your machine set to the tone dialing type of the telephone line?

Press [Tone] to set the tone dialing.

Do you receive messages from the information services such as to press [Start] after the beep to receive?

When you hear the beep sound, press [Start].

Errors occur frequently while receiving.

Are the telephone lines in poor condition, or do you have a bad connection?

Check if there is a device nearby that interferes with signal reception (e.g., microwave oven).

Is the sender's machine functioning properly?

Ask the sender to check that the machine is functioning properly.

Cannot print received documents on both sides of the paper.

Is <2-SIDED PRINT> set to <ON>?

Make sure that <2-SIDED PRINT> is set to <ON>. (See "Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (Fax).")



Copying Problems

Return to Overview


Blank paper comes out from the machine.

Copy is too light or has uneven density.

Copy has vertical white streaks.

Copy is spotted or dirty.

Paper jams occur.

Copy is skewed.

Copy is not clear.

Documents are copied in <CALENDAR TYPE> even if <BOOK TYPE> is selected (or vice versa).

The alarm sounds or <MEMORY FULL> appears in the display when making copies.

Blank paper comes out from the machine.

Have you removed the plastic seal from the toner cartridge?

Make sure you remove the seal from the cartridge. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")

Is the toner cartridge installed properly?

Make sure the toner cartridge is installed properly. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")

Is the cartridge out of toner?

Replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

Does the document meet the requirements for the machine?

Make sure you load documents that meet the requirements for use.(See "Document Handling.")

Copy is too light or has uneven density.

Is the toner low or unevenly distributed?

Redistribute the toner inside the toner cartridge. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

Copy has vertical white streaks.

Is the toner low or unevenly distributed?

Redistribute the toner inside the toner cartridge. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

Copy is spotted or dirty.

If the copy is spotted or dirty, clean the scanning components and machine's interior. (See "Cleaning the Machine.")

Paper jams occur.

Make sure the scanning platform and rear cover are fully closed. (See "Paper Jams.")

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded. (See "Loading Paper.")

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Copy is skewed.

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded in the machine. (See "Loading Paper.")

Make sure the paper delivery slot is free of obstructions.

Copy is not clear.

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Are you copying on the wrong side of the paper?

Some papers have a "right" side for copying. If the copy quality is not as clear as you think it should be, try copying on the other side of the paper.

Documents are copied in <CALENDAR TYPE> even if <BOOK TYPE> is selected (or vice versa).

Are you copying the landscape oriented documents?

For the landscape oriented documents, the front and back sides of the copy will have the opposite top bottom orientation when <BOOK TYPE> is selected. When <CALENDAR TYPE> is selected, the front and back side of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation. (See "2-Sided Copying.")

The alarm sounds or <MEMORY FULL> appears in the display when making copies.

Is the machine's memory full?

Check remaining memory. (See "Checking Remaining Memory.")



Printing Problems

Return to Overview


Blank paper comes out from the machine.

Printout is too light or has uneven density.

Printout has vertical white streaks.

Printout is spotted or dirty.

Printout is skewed.

Paper jams occur.

Printout is not clear.

Cannot print 2-sided documents.

Cannot print documents from a computer.

Blank paper comes out from the machine.

Have you removed the plastic seal from the toner cartridge?

Make sure you remove the seal from the cartridge. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")

Is the toner cartridge installed properly?

Make sure the toner cartridge is installed properly. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")

Is the cartridge out of toner?

Replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

Printout is too light or has uneven density.

Is the toner low or unevenly distributed?

Redistribute the toner inside the toner cartridge. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

Printout has vertical white streaks.

Is the toner low or unevenly distributed?

Redistribute the toner inside the toner cartridge. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

Printout is spotted or dirty.

If the copy is spotted or dirty, clean the scanning components and machine's interior. (See "Cleaning the Machine.")

Printout is skewed.

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded in the machine. (See "Loading Paper.")

Make sure the output tray slot is free of obstructions.

Paper jams occur.

Make sure the scanning platform and rear cover are fully closed. (See "Paper Jams.")

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded. (See "Loading Paper.")

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Printout is not clear.

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Are you printing on the wrong side of the paper?

Some types of paper have a "right" side for printing. If the printout quality is not as clear as you think it should be, try printing on the other side of the paper.

Cannot print 2-sided documents.

Is the printer driver settings correctly set for two sided printing?

Make sure that the printer driver is correctly set. (See "2-sided Printing.")

Cannot print documents from a computer.

Is the printer driver properly installed?

Make sure that the printer driver is properly installed.

Are the printer driver settings (Paper Size, Output Size) correct?

Make sure that the printer driver settings (Paper Size, Output Size) are correct. (See "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand.")

Is the USB cable properly connected to the machine and the computer?

Make sure that the USB cable is properly connected to the machine and the computer. Try a different USB cable.

Does the USB port you are using properly work?

Restart your computer and the machine. If the computer has other ports, connect the USB cable to others.

Are there any jobs remaining in the print queue?

A print job may be stuck in the print queue when it could not be finished due to an expected interruption. When this happens, follow this procedure to delete any remaining print jobs, and then print the documents again.
1. Double-click the icon of the printer you installed.

For Windows Vista:

Click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printer] under [Hardware and Sound].

For Windows 2000:

Click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Settings] → [Printers].

For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003:

Click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Printers and Faxes].

For Windows XP Home Edition:

Click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].

For Windows Server 2008:

Click [Control Panel] on the desktop → [Printers].

For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2:

Click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Devices and Printers].

2. Delete the print job.

For deleting all the print jobs:

Click [Printer] → [Cancel All Documents]

For the specified job:

Right-click the specified print job → [Cancel].



Scanning Problems

Return to Overview


Cannot scan a document.

You tried to create a multi-page PDF, but were not able to scan several documents.

Computer has hung up or frozen.

You installed the applications in the CD-ROM supplied with the machine but they are not registered in the MF Toolbox.

When you click a button on the MF Toolbox, another application opens.

Changed settings in a dialog box are not activated.

Scanned images look dirty.

Scanned image is displayed at a larger (smaller) size on the computer screen.

Cannot scan highlighted marks.

The amount of image data is too large to be scanned. (only for Color Network ScanGear)

Dark borders and frame lines that appear around the original have been scanned. (only for Color Network ScanGear)

Cannot scan a document.

Does anything appear on the display?

If nothing appears on the display, see "General Problems."

Is the Error indicator blinking?

If the Error indicator is blinking, see "General Problems."

Is the document placed correctly?

Remove the document and place it on the platen glass or in the ADF correctly. (See "Placing Documents.")

Is your computer working properly?

Restart your computer.

Is your USB hub or repeater working properly?

When using a USB hub or repeater, try connecting a USB cable directly to the computer to check if it works properly. If you can scan the document successfully after connecting a USB cable directly to the computer, check your USB hub or repeater if it is working properly.

Are you using a USB 2.0-compatible USB hub?

If you connect the machine to a USB 2.0-equipped computer using a USB 2.0-compatible USB hub, you may not be able to scan. In this case, connect a USB cable directly to the computer.

If you connect the machine to a USB 2.0-equipped computer, you may not be able to scan. If your computer is equipped with two or more USB ports, try connecting the machine to another USB port. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below to modify the INI file. It is recommended to make a backup copy of the file before making any changes to it.
1. Open the following file in Notepad or another text editor application.

Windows 2000:

winnt\system32\CNCMFP34x*.INI

Windows XP/Vista/7:

windows\system32\CNCMFP34x*.INI

2. In the [ScanSize] section, change "Read512Bytes=0" to "Read512Bytes=1," then save the file. Take care not to modify any other parts.

* "x" differs depending on the type of model: "a" for MF4380dn/MF4370dn and "b" for MF4350d.

Have you specified the document source correctly with the MF Toolbox, ScanGear MF, or WIA driver?

Choose between placing the document on the platen glass or in the ADF.

After installing the software for this machine, did you install a TWAIN-compatible application?

The TWAIN system file is replaced with something inappropriate and you will be unable to scan images. If this happens, remove the software, then reinstall it. (See "Set Up Computers and Software.")

Is the machine recognized in [Scanners and Cameras]?

Make sure the corresponding scanner driver icon is displayed in [Scanners and Cameras].
1. Click [start] on the Windows task bar → select [Control Panel] → [Printers and other Hardware] → [Scanners and Cameras]. (Windows 7: Enter "scanner" in [Search programs and files] under the [Start] menu → click [View scanners and cameras]. Windows Vista: [start] → [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Scanners and Cameras]. Windows 2000: [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → double-click [Scanners and Cameras].)
2. If the corresponding scanner driver icon is displayed in the [Scanners and Cameras], the machine is recognized. If not, remove the software, then reinstall it. (See "Set Up Computers and Software.")

You tried to create a multi-page PDF, but were not able to scan several documents.

Is the [Automatically Quit ScanGear after Scanning] check box in [Preferences] selected?

If you scan with the [Automatically Quit ScanGear after Scanning] setting selected, only the documents placed at one time on the platen glass will be scanned.
Click a button on the MF Toolbox and, in the settings dialog box, select [Display the Scanner Driver] to open the ScanGear MF. In the [Preferences] dialog box of Advanced Mode, clear the [Automatically Quit ScanGear after Scanning] check box before scanning.

Computer has hung up or frozen.

Is enough memory loaded in your computer?

Quit other opened applications and try again.

Is enough space available in the hard disk?

Check that the hard disk has enough available space, in particular when scanning large documents at a high resolution. For example, a LTR-size document scanned at 600 dpi, full color requires a minimum of 300 MB of disk space.

When an error occurred during scanning an image in Photoshop.

Change the allocated memory in Photoshop. From the [Edit] menu, select [Preferences] → click [Memory & Image Cache]. Change the [Memory Usage] in a range of approximately 50% to 60%.

Is the driver installed properly?

Remove the software, then reinstall it. (See "Set Up Computers and Software.")

You installed the applications in the CD-ROM supplied with the machine but they are not registered in the MF Toolbox.

Have you installed the applications with the MF Toolbox open?

If you install the applications with the MF Toolbox open, the applications will not be registered in the MF Toolbox. On the MF Toolbox dialog box, click [Set] to register the application manually. (See "External Application (E-mail Program).")

When you click a button on the MF Toolbox, another application opens.

Is the application selected correctly for that button?

Click a button on the MF Toolbox and select the application you want to open for that button. (See "External Application (E-mail Program).")

Changed settings in a dialog box are not activated.

Did you restart your computer after changing the settings?

If you open [Scanners and Cameras] and change the settings in the [Events] tab, the changes may not be reflected. In this case, restart your computer.

Scanned images look dirty.

Are the scanning components of the machine clean?

Clean the platen glass, cover and the ADF scanning area.

Is the image size too small?

Some applications do not display an image properly at small sizes. Try displaying the image at 100% magnification.

Is the monitor's display color set below 16 bits?

In [Display Properties], set the display colors to 16-bit color, 24-bit color or higher.

Scanned image is displayed at a larger (smaller) size on the computer screen.

Is the resolution setting correct?

Do one of the following:

  • Enlarge or reduce the image display in the application. If you open the image in Paint or Imaging, it may display at a large size and you will not be able to reduce it.
  • Change the resolution and scan again. The image will be large if the resolution is high. It will be small if the resolution is low. (See "Determining Resolution.")

Cannot scan highlighted marks.

Is [Color Correction] set to [Color Matching] ?

In [Advanced Mode] in ScanGear MF, set [Color Correction] to [Color Matching] in the [Color Settings] tab. (See "[Preferences] Dialog Box.")

The amount of image data is too large to be scanned. (only for Color Network ScanGear)

Select [High] from [Compression Ratio] in the [Options] sheet.

Dark borders and frame lines that appear around the original have been scanned. (only for Color Network ScanGear)

Perform the following steps:
1. Right-click in the Preview Area to display a pop-up menu.
2. On the pop-up menu, point to [Original Frame Erase] → click [On].



Telephone Problems

Return to Overview


Cannot dial.

Telephone disconnects while you are talking.

Calls do not connect, or the wrong number is dialed.

Cannot dial.

Is the telephone cable connected properly?

Make sure the cable is connected properly. (See "Connect Telephone Cables.")

Is the power cord plugged in securely?

Check that the power cord is securely plugged into the machine and into the wall outlet. If the machine is plugged into a power strip, make sure the power strip is plugged in and turned on.

Is the main power switch turned ON?

Turn ON the main power switch.

Is the machine set for the correct telephone line type?

Make sure the machine is set for the correct telephone line type. (See "Setting the Type of Telephone Line (Fax).")

Is the receive mode set to <FAX/TEL>?

If you cannot make telephone calls using an external telephone when the receive mode is set to <FAX/TEL>, make the settings described below.
[MENU] → <FAX SETTINGS> → <USER SETTINGS> → set <PUBLIC LINE> to <ADAPTER 1>.
If the problem persists, set <PUBLIC LINE> to <ADAPTER 2>.
* The default setting is <DIRECT>.
If you set <PUBLIC LINE> to <ADAPTER 1> or <ADAPTER 2>, do not connect the supplied directly to the wall jack and the telephone line jack on the back side of the machine.

Telephone disconnects while you are talking.

Is the telephone cable connected properly?

Make sure the cable is connected properly. (See "Connect Telephone Cables.")

Is the telephone cable defective?

Use another cord.

Calls do not connect, or the wrong number is dialed.

Did you check for the dial tone before entering the telephone number?

Make sure to check for the dial tone before entering a telephone number. If you enter the number before hearing the dial tone, the call may not connect or the wrong number may be dialed.



Network Problems

Return to Overview


Unable to print from a TCP/IP network.

The printer port name is not displayed in [Print to the following port(s)].

The machine automatically connects to a destination other than the intended destination via its dial-up access (when a dial-up router is connected to the network).

Detailed information concerning the machine cannot be set or browsed using the Remote UI or utility.

Unable to print from a TCP/IP network.

Are the machine and cable properly connected?

Check that the machine is connected to the network using the proper cable, then restart the machine. (See "Connect the LAN Cable.")

Is the TCP/IP network properly set up?

Make sure the IP addresses are properly set up. If the IP addresses are set using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, make sure they are operating.

Is the computer that is printing properly set up?

Make sure the proper printer driver is installed. (See "Set Up Computers and Software.")

Make sure the correct machine is set as the output destination for the computer that is printing in [Printers and Faxes] or Print Manager.

Is the name of the file being printed too long?

Rename the file with a shorter name. Normally LPR (or the Microsoft TCP/IP Printer, if you are using Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008) sends jobs either under the name of the application software used for printing or the file name. However, a job name longer than 255 bytes cannot be sent to the machine.

The printer port name is not displayed in [Print to the following port(s)].

Are the machine and cable properly connected?

Check that the machine is connected to the network using the proper cable, then restart the machine. (See "Connect the LAN Cable.")

Is the computer that is printing properly set up?

Make sure the proper printer driver is installed. (See "Set Up Computers and Software.")

Make sure the correct machine is set as the output destination for the computer that is printing in [Printers and Faxes] or [Printers].

The machine automatically connects to a destination other than the intended destination via its dial-up access (when a dial-up router is connected to the network).

Does the dial-up router send packets via broadcast?

If the dial-up router does not have to send packets via broadcast, change the router settings to ensure that it sends packets via a method other than broadcast. If the dial-up router has to send packets via broadcast, check that the settings are correct.

Dose the file or mail server's host name or IP address set on the machine exist on the network?

Check that the file or mail server's host name or IP address set on the machine is correct.

Does the DNS server exist on an external network?

If you attempt to access a device on the network to which the machine is connected, with the DNS server on an external network, set the destination using an IP address, not a host name.

Is the device's information set on the DNS server on the network to which the machine is connected correct?

If information about a device on an external network is set on the DNS server on the network to which the machine is connected, check the settings.

Detailed information concerning the machine cannot be set or browsed using the Remote UI or utility.

Are the settings for <SET IP ADD RANGE> correct?

If the settings for [IP Address Range Settings] do not permit the IP address of a computer on which the Remote UI or utility is used, you cannot set the machine setting items or browse information on the machine. Check the settings for <SET IP ADD RANGE>. (See "Controlling Machine Access Using IPv4 addresses" or "Controlling Machine Access Using IPv6 addresses.")

Is <USE SNMP> is set to <OFF>?

Set <USE SNMP> to <ON>. (See "Setting SNMP.")

Does the SNMP community name match?

If you use an SNMP community name different from the one stored in the machine to access the machine from a utility, the utility will not detect the machine. In this case, check the SNMP community name. (See "Setting SNMP.")



Installing and Uninstalling Problems

Return to Overview


Cannot install the software.

Removal of the drivers takes too long (Windows XP).

Removal of the software was completed, but the [Canon] folder remains in the [Start Menu].

Cannot use the software after upgrading to Windows XP/Vista/7.

Cannot install the software.

Have you followed the instructions to install the software?

Try reinstalling the software. If an error occurred and installation was not complete, restart your computer and try reinstalling the software.

Are any other applications open?

Quit all of these and try reinstalling the software.

Removal of the drivers takes too long (Windows XP).

Is any application such as an anti-virus open when removing the software?

Quit any applications (including anti-virus) before removing the software.

Removal of the software was completed, but the [Canon] folder remains in the [Start Menu].

Did you remove the MF drivers before removing the MF Toolbox?

If you remove the MF drivers first, the [Canon] folder may remain even after the MF Toolbox is uninstalled. In this case, perform the following steps to remove the folder.
In Windows XP/Server 2003, right-click the [start] menu to open the Windows Explorer → select [Start Menu] in [All Users] → [Programs] → delete the [Canon] folder.
In Windows Vista, right-click the [start] menu and select [Explore - All Users] → select [Start Menu] in [All Users] → [Programs] → delete the [Canon] folder.
In Windows 7, delete the [Canon] folder in [All Programs] under the [Start] menu.
In Windows Server 2008, right-click the [Start] menu and select [Explore All Users] → select [Start Menu]
In Windows 2000, open [Settings] from the [Start] menu → click [Taskbar & Start Menu] → [Advanced] → [Advanced] → select [Start Menu] in [All Users] → [Programs] → delete the [Canon] folder.

Cannot use the software after upgrading to Windows XP/Vista/7.

Have you upgraded Windows 2000 to Windows XP/Vista/7 without removing the software?

Remove the software, then reinstall it. (See ""Set Up Computers and Software.")



Uninstalling Software

If the printer/fax driver, MF Toolbox, or Color Network ScanGear becomes unnecessary, follow the procedure below to uninstall them.


Remark
  • Before performing uninstallation, confirm that:
  • You have the installation software (if you want to re-install the drivers)
  • No applications are running on your computer
  • For uninstallation, you must be the user with administrative privileges.
  • For uninstallation, first uninstall the MF Toolbox, and then the MF drivers.

  • Printer/Fax Driver

  1. From the Windows task bar, [Start] or [start] menu, click [Programs] or [All Programs] → [Canon] → [MF4360-4390] o [MF4320-4350] → [Uninstall Drivers].

The [MF Drivers Uninstaller] dialog box appears.


  1. Click [Delete].

  1. Click [Exit].

  • MF Toolbox

  1. From the Windows task bar, [Start] or [start] menu, click [Programs] or [All Programs] → [Canon] → [MF Toolbox 4.9] → [Toolbox Uninstall].

  1. Click [Remove].

  1. Click [Exit].

  • Color Network ScanGear

  1. From the Windows task bar, [Start] or [start] menu, click the items in the following order.

Windows 2000: [Settings] → [Control Panel] → [Add or Remove Programs]

Windows XP/Server 2003: [Control Panel] → [Add or Remove Programs]

Windows Vista/7/Server 2008: [Control Panel] → [Uninstall a program] under [Programs]


  1. Select [Color Network ScanGear Ver.2.40].

  1. Click the following icon.

Windows 2000: [Change/Remove]

Windows XP/Server 2003: [Remove]

Windows Vista/7: [Uninstall]

Windows Server 2008: [Uninstall/Change]



Maintenance

This category describes how to perform routine cleaning operations, and replace a toner cartridge.



Cleaning the Machine

Note the following before cleaning your machine:

  • Make sure no documents are stored in memory, then turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
  • Use a soft cloth to avoid scratching the components.
  • Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, or similar materials for cleaning; they can stick to the components or generate static charges.

Remark
  • Never use volatile liquids such as thinner, benzene, acetone, or any other chemical cleaner to clean the machine. These can damage the machine components.
  • When you turn OFF the main power switch, the data stored in memory will be retained for approximately 5 minutes. To check the jobs stored in memory, see the following:

Exterior

Interior

Fuser Roller

Scanning Area

Platen Glass


ADF (For MF4380dn)


ADF (For MF4370dn/MF4350d)



Exterior

Return to Overview

Clean the exterior of the machine.

  1. Turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
  1. Wipe the machine's exterior with a clean, soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water or diluted dishwashing detergent solution.
  1. Wait for the machine to dry, then reconnect the power cord and turn ON the main power switch.


Interior

Return to Overview

Clean the machine's print area periodically to prevent toner powder and paper dust from accumulating inside.

  1. Turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
  1. Hold the front side of the operation panel with your hands.
  1. Lift the scanning platform (A) until it is locked. (You will hear an audible "click.")
  1. Hold the grip (A) on the right front side of the toner cover.
  1. Open the toner cover.
  1. Remove the toner cartridge.
  • Do not touch the rollers and parts which have labels "CAUTION! Hot surface avoid contact" on. They become very hot during use.
  • To avoid exposing the toner cartridge to light, place it in its protective bag or wrap it in a thick cloth.
  • Do not open the drum protective shutter (A) on the toner cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.

  • Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle.
  1. Use a clean, soft, dry, lint-free cloth to remove any toner or paper debris from the machine's interior.
  • Do not touch the fixing assembly (A) as it becomes very hot during use.
  • Do not touch the transfer roller (B) as this can damage the machine.

  • If your hands or clothes get dirty from touching the toner, wash them immediately in cold water. Do not use hot water. If you do, the toner may be set permanently.
  1. Hold the toner cartridge by its handle (A).
  1. Insert the toner cartridge so that the protrusion (A) on the right side of the toner cartridge fits into the guide (B) located on the right side of the machine and slide it down parallel to the guide.
  1. Push the toner cartridge to make sure it is properly set in the machine.
  1. Hold the grip (A) on the right front side of the toner cover.
  1. Close the toner cover.
  1. Lower the scanning platform.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  • If you cannot close the toner cover, do not force it to close. Open the cover and make sure the toner cartridge is properly set in the machine.
  1. Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the main power switch.


Fuser Roller

Return to Overview

If black streaks appear with printing, the fuser roller in the main unit may be dirty. Should this occur, clean the fuser roller in the following procedure. The roller should also be cleaned each time the toner cartridge is replaced. Load a sheet of blank LTR paper into the multi-purpose tray and start cleaning.


Remark
  • Use standard paper as the cleaning paper.
  • Cleaning the roller takes approximately 130 seconds.
  • When some jobs are stored in memory, this function is not available.
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
  1. Load a sheet of blank LTR paper in the multi-purpose tray.

  • For MF4380dn/MF4370dn


  • For MF4350d

  1. Press [] or [] to select <FIX. UNIT CLEANING>, then press [OK].

Cleaning starts.

  • Throw away the cleaning paper after use.


Scanning Area

Return to Overview

Keep the scanning area clean to avoid dirty copies or faxes to be sent.


Remark
  • When cleaning the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical shock.

Platen Glass

ADF (For MF4380dn)

ADF (For MF4370dn/MF4350d)


Platen Glass

Return to Overview

Clean the platen glass and the underside of the ADF by following the procedure below.

  1. Turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
  1. Open the ADF.
  1. Clean the platen glass and the underside of the ADF with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
  • Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may tear the document or damage the machine.
  1. Close the ADF.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.


ADF (For MF4380dn)

Return to Overview

If your documents have black streaks or appear dirty after copying them using the ADF, this may be caused by pencil lead rubbing off the documents and onto the roller. Clean the ADF scanning area and roller.

  1. Turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
  1. Open the ADF cover.
  1. Clean the rollers (A) inside the ADF with a cloth dampened with water. Then wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
  • Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may tear the document or damage the machine.
  1. Close the ADF cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  1. Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the main power switch.


ADF (For MF4370dn/MF4350d)

Return to Overview

If your documents have black streaks or appear dirty after copying them using the ADF, this may be caused by pencil lead rubbing off the documents and onto the roller. Clean the ADF scanning area and roller.

  1. Turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
  1. Open the ADF cover.
  1. Clean the rollers (A) inside the ADF with a cloth dampened with water. Then wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
  • Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may tear the document or damage the machine.
  1. Close the ADF cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  1. Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the main power switch.


Replacing the Toner Cartridge

This section describes how to replace or handle the toner cartridges and precautions on storing them.


When a Message Appears

Redistributing Toner

Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One


When a Message Appears

Return to Overview

Toner cartridges are consumable products. If the toner is running low or out during printing, a message appears in the display.


Message When it is Displayed Contents and Remedies
TONER LOW
PREPARE NEW TONER
The toner is running low.
OUT OF TONER
CHANGE TONER
The toner is running out.


Redistributing Toner

Return to Overview

When the toner is running low, the message <TONER LOW/PREPARE NEW TONER> appears on the display, redistribute toner in the toner cartridge. We recommend that you prepare a new toner cartridge for future replacement with ease.


Remark
  • Do not touch the rollers and parts which have labels "CAUTION! Hot surface avoid contact" on. They become very hot during use.
  • When <CONT. PRINTING> is set to <ON>, the printed documents may be light or blurred because of lack of toner. The data is erased when the documents are printed out, so you cannot print the same documents again. (See "FAX SETTINGS")
  1. Hold the front side of the operation panel with your hands.
  1. Lift the scanning platform (A) until it is locked. (You will hear an audible "click.")
  1. Hold the grip (A) on the right front side of the toner cover
  1. Open the toner cover.
  1. Remove the toner cartridge.
  • Do not touch the rollers and parts which have labels "CAUTION! Hot surface avoid contact" on. They become very hot during use.
  1. Gently rock the toner cartridge several times to evenly distribute toner inside.
  1. Hold the toner cartridge by its handle (A).
  • Do not open the drum protective shutter (A) on the toner cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.

  • Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle.
  1. Insert the toner cartridge so that the protrusion (A) on the right side of the toner cartridge fits into the guide (B) located on the right side of the machine and slide it down parallel to the guide.
  1. Push the toner cartridge to make sure it is properly set in the machine.
  1. Hold the grip (A) on the right front side of the toner cover.
  1. Close the toner cover.
  1. Lower the scanning platform.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  • If you cannot close the toner cover, do not force it to close. Open the cover and make sure the toner cartridge is properly set in the machine.


Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One

Return to Overview

When the message <OUT OF TONER /CHANGE TONER> appears, replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
When toner empty error occurs while receiving fax, printing fax is interrupted and the received data will be stored in the memory. If you set <CONT. PRINTING> to <ON>, you can keep printing fax documents or reports without replacing the toner cartridge. (See "FAX SETTINGS")


Remark
  • Do not touch the rollers and parts which have labels "CAUTION! Hot surface avoid contact" on. They become very hot during use.
  • When <CONT. PRINTING> is set to <ON>, the printed documents may be light or blurred because of lack of toner. The data is erased when the documents are printed out, so you cannot print the same documents again. (See "FAX SETTINGS")
  1. Hold the front side of the operation panel with your hands.
  1. Lift the scanning platform (A) until it is locked. (You will hear an audible "click.")
  1. Hold the grip (A) on the right front side of the toner cover.
  1. Open the toner cover.
  1. Remove the toner cartridge.
  • Do not touch the rollers and parts which have labels "CAUTION! Hot surface avoid contact" on. They become very hot during use.
  1. Take out the new toner cartridge from the protective bag.
  • Do not open the drum protective shutter (A). Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.

  • Save the protective bag. You may need it later when you remove the toner cartridge from the machine.
  1. Gently rock the toner cartridge several times to evenly distribute toner inside.
  1. Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface and pull the seal completely out.
  • Do not pull the seal out at an angle.
  • If toner is adhered on the removed seal, be careful that your hands or clothes do not get dirty from touching the toner.
  • If your hands or clothes get dirty from touching the toner, wash them immediately in cold water. Do not use hot water. If you do, the toner may be set permanently.

  1. Hold the toner cartridge by its handle (A).
  • Do not open the drum protective shutter (A) on the toner cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.

  • Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle.
  1. Insert the toner cartridge so that the protrusion (A) on the right side of the toner cartridge fits into the guide (B) located on the right side of the machine and slide it down parallel to the guide.
  1. Push the toner cartridge to make sure it is properly set in the machine.
  1. Hold the grip (A) on the right front side of the toner cover.
  1. Close the toner cover.
  1. Lower the scanning platform.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  • If you cannot close the toner cover, do not force it to close. Open the cover and make sure the toner cartridge is properly set in the machine.


Recycling Used Cartridges

Canon has instituted a worldwide recycling program for cartridges called "The Clean Earth Campaign." This program preserves precious natural resources by utilizing a variety of materials found in the used cartridges that are of no further use, to remanufacture new cartridges which, at the same time, keeps the environment cleaner by reducing landfill waste. Complete details concerning this program are enclosed in each Cartridge box.

The Clean Earth Campaign – The Canon Cartridge Return Program

U.S.A. PROGRAM


Packaging


Shipping


Canadian Program – Programme au Canada



The Clean Earth Campaign – The Canon Cartridge Return Program

Return to Overview

The Canon Cartridge Return Program fulfills the first initiative of Canon's Clean Earth Campaign, which supports four critical environmental areas:

  • Recycling in the Workplace
  • Conserving Environmental Resources
  • Scientific Research and Education
  • Encouraging Appreciation of the Outdoors

"Clean Earth" initiatives supported by Canon in the U.S. include Eyes on Yellowstone, Canon Envirothon, NATURE Series on PBS and The Canon Clean Earth Crew. Initiatives supported in Canada include Canon Envirothon and World Wildlife Fund - Canada.

Since its inception, The Canon Cartridge Return Program has collected millions of cartridges that otherwise would have been discarded into landfills or similar facilities. Instead, this rapidly growing program recovers used cartridges and separates them into components which are then put to various industrial uses.

Becoming a part of this worthwhile program is easy. When your cartridge is of no further use, simply follow the instructions detailed for U.S. or Canadian residents.

We appreciate your support of The Canon Cartridge Return Program.

Working together we can make a significant contribution to a cleaner planet.

  • Cartridges collected through this program are not refilled.
  • This program may be modified or discontinued without notice.



Packaging

Return to Overview


  • One Box Return

To receive your free eight cartridge collection box:
Call 1-800-OK-CANON

or

Visit www.usa.canon.com/cleanearth/return

OR

Place as many cartridges as possible into one box. Carefully seal the box with tape;

OR

Place an empty toner cartridge in the box that contained your new toner cartridge.


  • Bundled Return

Bundle multiple cartridge boxes together securely with tape.

Please be sure that the shipment does not exceed UPS specifications (See Below).

Maximum weight = 70 pounds Maximum length = 108 inches
Maximum girth (length + 2 x width + 2 x height) = 130 inches

Please Note:
Do not send defective cartridges for replacement.
Defective cartridges under warranty should be exchanged by an authorized dealer or service facility as provided in the warranty.



Shipping

Return to Overview

Make sure the UPS A.R.S. label is applied.


  • UPS Pick-up

Give the shipment to your UPS driver when you receive your next regular delivery.


Call 1-800-PICK-UPS for Drop-Off options in your area.


By using either of the above methods of shipment, your used cartridge(s) will be forwarded to the Canon Cartridge Collection Center at no charge to you.

Residents of Alaska and Hawaii: Do not use UPS authorized return label. Alternative return service with the U.S. Postal Service is available by calling 1-800-OK-CANON or visit www.usa.canon.com/cleanearth/return


For further information about the Clean Earth Campaign in the United States, please call: 1-800-OK-CANON or visit www.usa.canon.com/cleanearth



Canadian Program – Programme au Canada

Return to Overview


  • Single Box Return
  • Repackage the empty toner cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end-blocks from the new cartridge's box.
  • Place the empty toner cartridge in the box from your new toner cartridge. Seal the box.
  • Apply the Canon Canada Inc./ Canada Post label provided in this brochure. Canon's labels are specially marked so that Canon pays the postage.
  • Deposit your empty toner cartridge in any full size street mailbox or take it to your local Canada Post outlet or franchise.


  • Volume Box Return (Maximum 8 Cartridges)

We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.

  • Please tape your eight cartridges together and place them in a box.
  • Apply the Canon Canada Inc./ Canada Post label provided in this brochure. Canon's labels are specially marked so that Canon pays the postage.
  • Deliver to any local Canada Post outlet or franchise. Customers who hold a Commercial pick-up agreement with Canada Post may have their collection box picked up.


Working to protect the environment is a long-standing Canon interest. To this end, for every cartridge collected, Canon Canada donates funds to World Wildlife Fund - Canada and the Canon Envirothon.

For further information about The Clean Earth Campaign in Canada, please write to Canon.
Canon Canada Inc.
Corporate Customer Relations
6390 Dixie Road
Mississauga, ON L5T 1P7



Adjusting the Machine

This section describes how you can adjust the settings of the machine to improve print quality and to prevent paper jams, which may occur when a variety of functions are used. It is recommended that you perform these settings regularly to prevent a number of problems from occurring.


Reducing Blur (Special Mode T)

Improving Print Quality (Special Mode U)

Reducing Paper Curl (Special Mode V)

Adjusting Toner Fixing (Special Mode Y)

Reducing Fog (Special Mode Z)


Reducing Blur (Special Mode T)

Return to Overview

Sets whether to prevent blur from appearing on the printouts for copying, receiving info, and reports.
The default settings is <OFF>


Remark
  • When this setting is set to <ON>, the density of printouts may become light.
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SPECIAL MODE T>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Improving Print Quality (Special Mode U)

Return to Overview

Select to improve print quality in high temperature and high humidity conditions or in low temperature and low humidity conditions.
The default settings is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SPECIAL MODE U>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MODE1> or <MODE2>, then press [OK].
  • <OFF>: Select in normal condition.
  • <MODE1>: Select to improve print quality in low temperature and low humidity conditions, or when using thick paper or an envelope.
  • <MODE2>: Select to improve print quality in high temperature and high humidity conditions.
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Reducing Paper Curl (Special Mode V)

Return to Overview

Sets whether to prevent small size paper (B5, A5, EXECUTIVE, etc) from being curled.
The default settings is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SPECIAL MODE V>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Adjusting Toner Fixing (Special Mode Y)

Return to Overview

Sets to enhance the fixing characteristics of toner under the conditions of a low temperature environment.
The default settings is <OFF>.


Remark
  • When this setting is set to <ON>, first copy time and the time to resume from the Sleep mode may take longer.
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SPECIAL MODE Y>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Reducing Fog (Special Mode Z)

Return to Overview

Sets whether to reduce fog appearing on the printouts for copying, receiving info, and reports.
The default settings is <OFF>.


Remark
  • When this setting is set to <ON>, the density of printouts may become light.
  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SPECIAL MODE Z>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.


Transporting the Machine

This section describes the required procedures before transporting the machine.


For MF4380dn/MF4370dn

For MF4350d


For MF4380dn/MF4370dn

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to avoid vibration damage to the machine when transporting it over a long distance.

  1. Turn OFF the main power switch.
  1. Disconnect the power cord and all the cables from the back of the machine.
  1. If you are using the output tray extension, fold the paper stopper, and then push the output tray extension into the machine.
  1. Hold the front side of the operation panel with your hands.
  1. Lift the scanning platform (A) until it is locked. (You will hear an audible "click.")
  1. Hold the grip (A) on the right front side of the toner cover.
  1. Open the toner cover.
  1. Remove the toner cartridge.
  • To avoid exposing the toner cartridge to light, place it in its protective bag or wrap it in a thick cloth.
  • Do not open the drum protective shutter (A) on the toner cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.

  • Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle.
  1. Hold the grip (A) on the right front side of the toner cover.
  1. Close the toner cover.
  1. Lower the scanning platform.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  1. Remove the dust cover from the paper cassette.
  1. Open the front panel of the paper cassette.
  1. Remove the paper from the paper cassette.
  1. Remove the paper cassette by lifting up the front-end of the paper cassette and pulling it forward.
  1. Detach the Document feeder tray.

For MF4380dn, skip to step 17.

  1. Make sure all the covers are closed.
  1. Grip the handles on both sides of the machine and lift it carefully, as shown in the illustration below.
  • Do not lift the machine by any of its attachments. Dropping the machine can cause personal injury.
  • If you have a back problem, make sure to check the weight of this machine before carrying. (See "Specifications.")


For MF4350d

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to avoid vibration damage to the machine when transporting it over a long distance.

  1. Turn OFF the main power switch.
  1. Disconnect the power cord and all the cables from the back of the machine.
  1. If you are using the output tray extension, fold the paper stopper, and then push the output tray extension into the machine.
  1. Hold the front side of the operation panel with your hands.
  1. Lift the scanning platform (A) until it is locked. (You will hear an audible "click.")
  1. Hold the grip (A) on the right front side of the toner cover.
  1. Open the toner cover.
  1. Remove the toner cartridge.
  • To avoid exposing the toner cartridge to light, place it in its protective bag or wrap it in a thick cloth.
  • Do not open the drum protective shutter (A) on the toner cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.

  • Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle.
  1. Hold the grip (A) on the right front side of the toner cover.
  1. Close the toner cover.
  1. Lower the scanning platform.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  1. Remove the dust cover from the paper feeding tray.
  1. Remove the paper from the paper feeding tray.
  1. Store the dust cover inside the machine.
  1. Push the paper guide rail, and then close the paper feeding tray.
  1. Detach the Document feeder tray.
  1. Make sure all the covers are closed.
  1. Grip the handles on both sides of the machine and lift it carefully, as shown in the illustration below.
  • Do not lift the machine by any of its attachments. Dropping the machine can cause personal injury.
  • If you have a back problem, make sure to check the weight of this machine before carrying. (See "Specifications".)


Specifications

Remark
  • Specifications are subject to change without notice.


General

General
  • Type
Personal Desktop
  • Power Source
120 V-127 V, 60 Hz (Power requirements differ depending on the country in which you purchased the product.)
  • Power Consumption
MF4380dn
Maximum: Less than 630 W
MF4370dn/MF4350d
Maximum: Less than 620 W
  • Warm up Time
MF4380dn/MF4370dn: Less than 12.0 sec.*
MF4350d: Less than 10.0 sec.*
(temperature: 68°F (20°C), humidity: 65%; from when the machine turns on the power main switch until the standby display appears)
* Warm-up time may differ depending on the condition and environment of the machine.
  • Weight
MF4380dn: Approx. 32.0 lb (14.5 kg)
(including toner cartridge)
MF4370dn: Approx. 29.1 lb (13.2 kg)
(including toner cartridge)
MF4350d: Approx. 29.5 lb (13.4 kg)
(including toner cartridge)
  • Dimensions
MF4380dn: 14 3/8" (H) x 18 7/8" (D) x 15 3/8" (W) (363 mm (H) x 465 mm (D) x 390 mm (W))
(with the document feeder tray and the paper cassette attached)
MF4370dn: 18" (H) x 17 1/2" (D) x 15 3/8" (W) (455 mm (H) x 442 mm (D) x 390 mm (W))
(with the document feeder tray and the paper cassette attached)
MF4350d: 18" (H) x 17 3/4" (D) x 15 3/8" (W) (455 mm (H) x 450 mm (D) x 390 mm (W))
(with the document feeder tray attached)
  • Installation Space
MF4380dn
43 1/8" (D) x 24 3/4" (W) (1093 mm (D) x 627 mm (W))
MF4370dn/MF4350d
39 7/8" (D) x 23 1/4" (W) (1013 mm (D) x 590 mm (W))
  • Environmental Conditions
Temperature: 50°F–86°F (10.0°C–30.0°C)
Humidity: 20%–80% RH (no condensation)
  • Display Languages
ENGLISH/FRENCH/SPANISH/PORTUGUESE
  • Acceptable Documents
Documents Requirements.
  • Acceptable Paper Stock
Paper Requirements.
  • Printable Area
Printable Area.
  • Scanning Area
Scanning Area.


Copier

Copier
  • Scanning Resolution
TEXT/PHOTO mode: 300 dpi x 300 dpi
TEXT mode, PHOTO mode, TEXT/PHOTO+ mode: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
  • Printing Resolution
600 dpi x 600 dpi
  • Magnification
1:1 ± 1.0%, 1:2.00, 1:1.29, 1:0.78, 1:0.64, 1:0.50
Zoom 0.50–2.00, 1% increments
  • Copy Speed
Direct: 23 cpm (LTR)
  • No. of Copies
Maximum 99 copies
  • First Copy Time
Platen glass: less than 9.00 sec. (LTR)


Printer

Printer
  • Printing Method
Indirect electrostatic method (On-demand fixing)
  • Paper Handling
  • Paper cassette: 250 sheets (Height: Maximum 1" (25 mm))
  • Multi-purpose tray: 1 sheet
  • Paper Delivery
100 sheets (17 to 21 lb (64 to 80 g/m2))
  • Print Speed
Direct: 23 ppm (LTR)
  • Printing Resolution
600 dpi x 600 dpi
  • Number of Tones
256
  • Toner Cartridge
Toner Cartridges.


Scanner

  • Scanning via USB

Scanner
  • Type
Color scanner
  • Maximum Scanning Size
8 1/2" x 14" (216 mm x 356 mm)
  • Scanning Resolution
600 x 1200 dpi (optical)
9600 x 9600 dpi (enhanced)
  • Scanning Speed
Color: 4.5 msec/line (600 dpi)
Grayscale: 1.5 msec/line (600 dpi)
  • Host Interface
USB 1.1, USB 2.0
  • System Requirements
Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7
  • Device Driver
TWAIN and WIA 1.0* (Windows XP/Vista/7 only) compliant
*WIA 2.0 is not supported.

  • Scanning via Network (MF4380dn/MF4370dn Only)

Scanner
  • Type
Color scanner
  • Maximum Scanning Size
8 1/2" x 14" (216 mm x 356 mm)
  • Scanning Resolution
75 dpi, 100 dpi, 150 dpi, 200 dpi, 300 dpi
  • Scanning Speed
Color: 2.25 msec/line (300 dpi)
Grayscale: 0.75 msec/line (300 dpi)
  • Host Interface
100Base-TX/10Base-T
  • System Requirements
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/7/Server 2008
  • Device Driver
TWAIN


Facsimile

Facsimile
  • Applicable Line
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)*1
  • Compatibility
G3
  • Data Compression Schemes
MH, MR, MMR
  • Modem Speed
33.6 Kbps
Automatic fallback
  • Transmission Speed
Approx. 3 seconds/page*2 at 33.6 Kbps, ECM-MMR,
transmitting from the memory
  • Transmission/Reception Memory
Maximum approx. 256 pages*2
(total pages of transmission/reception)
  • Fax Resolution
STANDARD: 203 pels/inch x 98 lines/inch (8 pels/mm x 3.85 lines/mm)
FINE: 203 pels/inch x 196 lines/inch (8 pels/mm x 7.7 lines/mm)
PHOTO: 203 pels/inch x 196 lines/inch (8 pels/mm x 7.7 lines/mm)
SUPER FINE: 203 pels/inch x 392 lines/inch (8 pels/mm x 15.4lines/mm)
  • Dialing
  • Speed dialing
    One-touch speed dialing (8 destinations)
    Coded speed dialing (100 destinations)
    Group dialing (8 x 50 recipients)
    Address Book dialing (with Address Book key)
  • Regular dialing (with numeric keys)
  • Automatic redialing
  • Manual redialing (with Redial/Pause key)
  • Sequential broadcast (124 destinations)
  • Receiving
  • Automatic reception
  • Remote reception by telephone (Default ID: 25)
  • Report
  • ACTIVITY REPORT (after every 60 transactions)
  • TX (Transmission)/RX (Reception) REPORT
  • TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification)

*1 The Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) currently supports 28.8 Kbps modem speed or lower, depending on telephone line conditions.
*2 Based on ITU-T Standard Chart No. 1, MMR standard mode.


Telephone

Telephone
  • Connection
External telephone/external telephone with built in answering machine/data modem


Document Handling

Documents Requirements

Scanning Area


Documents Requirements

Return to Overview



Platen Glass ADF
Type Plain paper
Thick documents
Photographs
Small documents (e.g., index cards)
Special types of paper (e.g., tracing paper*1, transparencies*1, etc.)
Book (Height: Maximum 1" (24 mm))
Plain paper (Multi-page documents of the same size, thickness and weight or one-page documents.)
Size (W x L) Maximum 8 1/2" x 11 5/8"
(Maximum 216 mm x 297 mm)
Maximum 8 1/2" x 14" (Maximum 216 x 356 mm)
Minimum 4 1/8" x 5 7/8" (Minimum 105 x 148.5 mm)
Weight Maximum 4.4 lb (2 kg) 11 to 28 lb (40 to 105 g/m2)
Quantity 1 sheet MF4380dn
Maximum 50 sheets*2
(Maximum 10 sheets for LGL documents)*2
MF4370dn/MF4350d
Maximum 35 sheets*2
(Maximum 10 sheets for LGL documents)*2

*1 When copying transparent documents such as tracing paper or transparencies, use a piece of plain white paper to cover the document after placing it face-down on the platen glass.
*2 21 lb (80 g/m2) paper

  • Do not place the document on the platen glass or in the ADF until the glue, ink or correction fluid on the document is completely dry.
  • To prevent originals jams in the ADF, do not use any of the following:
  • Wrinkled or creased paper
  • Carbon paper or carbon-backed paper
  • Curled or rolled paper
  • Coated paper
  • Torn paper
  • Onion skin or thin paper
  • Documents with staples or paper clips attached
  • Paper printed with a thermal transfer printer
  • Transparencies


Scanning Area

Return to Overview

Make sure your document's text and graphics fall within the shaded area in the following diagram. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use.



Print Media

Paper Requirements

Printable Area


Paper Requirements

Return to Overview


Paper cassette/Multi-purpose tray
Size (W x L) LTR, LGL, A4, B5, A5, Executive, Envelope (COM10 (#10), Monarch, DL, ISO-C5 (6 3/8" x 9" (162 x 229 mm)), Oficio, Brazil-Oficio, Mexico-Oficio, Government-LTR, Government-LGL, Foolscap, 3" x 5" to 8 1/2" x 14" (76 x 127 to 216 x 356 mm)
Weight 16 to 43 lb (60 to 163 g/m2)
Quantity Paper cassette: Maximum 250 sheets (Height: Maximum 1" (25 mm))
Multi-purpose tray: Maximum 1 sheet
Type Plain Paper, Plain Paper L, Heavy Paper, Heavy Paper H, Transparency

Remark
  • The default paper size is LTR. If you use a different paper size, you need to change the paper size settings. (See "Setting Paper Size and Type.")

  • To prevent paper jams, do not use any of the following:
  • Wrinkled or creased paper
  • Curled or rolled paper
  • Coated paper
  • Torn paper
  • Damp paper
  • Very thin paper
  • Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not copy on the reverse side.)
  • The following types of paper do not print well:
  • Highly textured paper
  • Very smooth paper
  • Shiny paper
  • Make sure the paper is free from dust, lint, and oil stains.
  • Make sure to test paper before purchasing large quantities.
  • Store all paper wrapped and on a flat surface until ready for use. Keep opened packs in their original packaging in a cool, dry location.
  • Store paper at 64.4°F–75.2°F (18°C–24°C), 40%–60% relative humidity.
  • Use only the transparencies designed for laser printers. Canon recommends you to use Canon type transparencies with this machine.


Printable Area

Return to Overview

The shaded area indicates the approximate printable area of LTR paper and envelope. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use.



Machine Settings

This category describes how to adjust the machine settings from the Setting Menu to customize the way the machine works. To see the list of the current settings, print out USER DATA LIST.



Printing USER DATA LIST

To print USER DATA LIST, follow the procedures bellow.

  1. Press [Report] repeatedly to select <USER DATA LIST>, then press [OK].

USER DATA LIST will be printed.



Accessing the Setting Menu

To access the setting menu, follow the procedures bellow.

  1. Press [Menu].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the menu you want to access, then press [OK].
  • <VOLUME CONTROL>
  • <BROADCAST>
  • <COMMON SETTINGS>
  • <COPY SETTINGS>
  • <FAX SETTINGS>
  • <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>
  • <PRINTER SETTINGS>
  • <TIMER SETTINGS>
  • <ADJUST./CLEANING>
  • <REPORT SETTINGS>
  • <SYSTEM SETTINGS>
  1. Press [] or [] to select a submenu, then press [OK].
  1. To register the settings or go to a submenu item, press [OK].
  1. When finished, press [Stop/Reset] to return to the standby mode.
  • If you press [Stop/Reset] before pressing [OK], the setting will not be registered.
  • Press [Menu] to return to the previous display.


Setting Menu

The default settings are indicated in bold text.

  • Depending on the country of purchase, some settings may not be available.

VOLUME CONTROL

BROADCAST

COMMON SETTINGS

COPY SETTINGS

FAX SETTINGS

ADDRESS BOOK SET.

PRINTER SETTINGS

TIMER SETTINGS

ADJUST./CLEANING

REPORT SETTINGS

SYSTEM SETTINGS


VOLUME CONTROL

Return to Overview


VOLUME CONTROL
Item Settings Applicable Page
1 MONITOR VOLUME (0-3) (2) Setting the Monitor Volume
2 CALLING TONE (0-3) (2) Setting the Audible Tones
3 ENTRY TONE (0-3) (2)
4 ERROR TONE (0-3) (2)


BROADCAST

Return to Overview


BROADCAST
Item Settings Applicable Page
NO.0##= Maximum 124 recipients Sending Documents to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (Fax)


COMMON SETTINGS

Return to Overview


COMMON SETTINGS
Item Settings Applicable Page
1 INITIAL FUNCTION
  • COPY
  • FAX
  • SCAN
Setting the Initial Function
2 TONER SAVER MODE
  • OFF
  • ON
Setting the Toner Save Mode
3 DISPLAY LANGUAGE
  • ENGLISH
  • FRENCH
  • SPANISH
  • PORTUGUESE
Changing the Language Shown on the Display


COPY SETTINGS

Return to Overview


COPY SETTINGS
Item Settings Applicable Page
1 STANDARD SETTINGS Changing Standard Mode (Copy)

1 IMAGE QUALITY

  • TEXT/PHOTO
  • TEXT
  • PHOTO
  • TEXT/PHOTO+

2 DENSITY

  • AUTO
  • MANUAL (1-9 (5))

3 ZOOM RATIO

PRESET RATIO

  • 200% MAX.
  • 129% STMT → LTR
  • 100%
  • 78% LGL → LTR
  • 64%
  • 50% MIN.

MANUAL

1 % increments. (50-200% (100%))

4 AUTO COLLATE

  • OFF
  • ON

5 2-SIDED

  • 2-SIDED OFF
  • 1 > 2-SIDED:
  • TYPE OF OUTPUT (BOOK TYPE, CALENDAR TYPE)
  • 2 > 2-SIDED*:
  • TYPE OF ORIGINAL (BOOK TYPE, CALENDAR TYPE)
  • TYPE OF OUTPUT (BOOK TYPE, CALENDAR TYPE)
  • 2 > 1-SIDED*:
  • TYPE OF ORIGINAL (BOOK TYPE, CALENDAR TYPE)
2 PAPER SIZE GROUP
  • INCHES
  • A
  • AB
Selecting Paper Size Group

* MF4380dn only



FAX SETTINGS

Return to Overview


FAX SETTINGS
Item Settings Applicable Page
1 RX MODE Methods for Receiving Faxes

FAX/TEL

Selecting the Receive Mode (Fax)

1 RING START TIME

4-30SEC (6SEC)

2 F/T RING TIME

10-45SEC (22SEC)

3 F/T SWITCH ACTION

  • RECEIVE
  • DISCONNECT

MANUAL

FaxOnly

AnsMode

DRPD

  • NORMAL RING
  • DOUBLE RING
  • SHORT-SHORT-LONG
  • SHORT-LONG-SHORT
  • OTHER RING TYPE
2 USER SETTINGS

1 UNIT TELEPHONE #

Maximum 20 digits Register User Telephone Number and Unit Name

2 UNIT NAME

Maximum 32 characters

3 TEL LINE TYPE

  • TOUCH TONE
  • ROTARY PULSE
Setting the Type of Telephone Line (Fax)

4 PUBLIC LINE

  • DIRECT
  • ADAPTER 1
  • ADAPTER 2
Selecting the Receive Mode (Fax)

5 STANDARD SETTINGS

Changing Standard Mode (Fax)

1 DENSITY

1-9 (5)

2 IMAGE QUALITY

  • STANDARD
  • FINE
  • PHOTO
  • SUPER FINE
3 TX SETTINGS

1 AUTO REDIAL

  • OFF
  • ON
Redialing Automatically

REDIAL TIMES

1-10TIMES (2TIMES)

REDIAL INTERVAL

2-99MIN. (2MIN.)

2 DIALING LINE CHCK

  • OFF
  • ON
Checking the Dial Tone before Sending (Fax)
4 RX SETTINGS

1 INCOMING RING

  • OFF
  • ON
Setting the Incoming Ring (Fax)

RING COUNT

1-16TIMES (2TIMES)

2 REMOTE RX

  • OFF
  • ON
Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote RX) (Fax)

REMOTE RX ID

00-99 (25)

3 RX PRINT

  • MEMORY RX
  • PRINT RX
Selecting the Receive Mode for Printing (Fax)

4 RX TERMINAL ID

  • OFF
  • ON
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document (Fax)

5 RX RESTRICTION

  • OFF
  • ON
Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the Unidentified Senders (Fax)
5 PRINTER SETTINGS

1 RX REDUCTION

  • OFF
  • ON
  • CUT
Reducing a Received Document (Fax)

2 2-SIDED PRINT

  • OFF
  • ON
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (Fax)

3 CONT. PRINTING

  • OFF
  • ON
Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Runs Out (Fax)


ADDRESS BOOK SET.

Return to Overview


ADDRESS BOOK SET
Item Settings Applicable Page
1 1-TOUCH SPD DIAL Maximum 8 recipients Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys

NAME

Maximum 20 characters

TEL NUMBER ENTRY

Maximum 50 digits
2 CODED DIAL Maximum 100 recipients Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes

NAME

Maximum 20 characters

TEL NUMBER ENTRY

Maximum 50 digits
3 GROUP DIAL Maximum 8 groups Storing/Editing Recipients for Group Dialing

NAME

Maximum 20 characters

NO.0##=

Maximum 50 recipients x 8 groups


PRINTER SETTINGS

Return to Overview


PRINTER SETTINGS
Item Settings Applicable Page
1 ERROR TIME OUT
  • OFF
  • ON (5-300SEC (15SEC))
ERROR TIME OUT


TIMER SETTINGS

Return to Overview


TIMER SETTINGS
Item Settings Applicable Page
1 DATE&TIME SETTING
  • HOUR (00-23)
  • MINUTE (00-59)
  • MONTH (01-12)
  • DAY (01-28, 29, 30, 31)
  • YEAR (00-99)
Setting the Current Date and Time
2 DATE TYPE SELECT
  • MM/DD/YYYY
  • DD/MM YYYY
  • YYYY MM/DD
Set Date and Time
3 AUTO SLEEP
  • OFF
  • ON (3-30MIN. (5MIN.))
Setting the Sleep Mode
4 DAYLIGHT SV.TIME
  • OFF
  • ON
Setting the Daylight Saving Time

1 START DATE/TIME

  • 1 MONTH (JANUARY, FEBRUARY, MARCH, APRIL, MAY, JUNE, JULY, AUGUST, SEPTEMBER, OCTOBER, NOVEMBER, DECEMBER)
  • 2 WEEK (FIRST WEEK, SECOND WEEK, THIRD WEEK, FOURTH WEEK, LAST WEEK)
  • 3 DAY (SUNDAY, MONDAY, TUESDAY, WEDNESDAY, THURSDAY, FRIDAY, SATURDAY)

2 END DATE/TIME

  • 1 MONTH (JANUARY, FEBRUARY, MARCH, APRIL, MAY, JUNE, JULY, AUGUST, SEPTEMBER, OCTOBER, NOVEMBER, DECEMBER)
  • 2 WEEK (FIRST WEEK, SECOND WEEK, THIRD WEEK, FOURTH WEEK, LAST WEEK)
  • 3 DAY (SUNDAY, MONDAY, TUESDAY, WEDNESDAY, THURSDAY, FRIDAY, SATURDAY)


ADJUST./CLEANING

Return to Overview


ADJUST CLEANING
Item Settings Applicable Page
1 FIX.UNIT CLEANING Start cleaning. Fuser Roller
2 SPECIAL MODE T
  • OFF
  • ON
Reducing Blur (Special Mode T)
3 SPECIAL MODE U
  • OFF
  • MODE1
  • MODE2
Improving Print Quality (Special Mode U)
4 SPECIAL MODE V
  • OFF
  • ON
Reducing Paper Curl (Special Mode V)
5 SPECIAL MODE Y
  • OFF
  • ON
Adjusting Toner Fixing (Special Mode Y)
6 SPECIAL MODE Z
  • OFF
  • ON
Reducing Fog (Special Mode Z)


REPORT SETTINGS

Return to Overview


REPORT SETTINGS
Item Settings Applicable Page
1 TX REPORT
  • OUTPUT NO
  • PRINT ERROR ONLY
  • OUTPUT YES
TX Report
2 RX REPORT
  • OUTPUT NO
  • OUTPUT YES
  • PRINT ERROR ONLY
RX Report
3 ACTIVITY REPORT
  • OUTPUT YES
  • OUTPUT NO
Activity Report


SYSTEM SETTINGS

Return to Overview


SYSTEM SETTINGS
Item Settings Applicable Page
1 SYS. MANAGER INFO

1 SYSTEM PASSWORD

Seven digits Specifying the System Manager Settings
2 DEVICE INFO Device Information Settings

1 DEVICE NAME

Maximum 32 characters

2 LOCATION

Maximum 32 characters
3 NETWORK SETTINGS*

1 TCP/IP SETTINGS

1 IPv4 SETTINGS

1 IP ADDRESS AUTO.

Setting IPv4 Address Automatically

ON

  • DHCP (ON/OFF)
  • BOOTP (OFF/ON)
  • RARP (OFF/ON)

OFF

2 IP ADDRSSS

IP address (000.000.000.000) Setting IPv4 Address Manually

3 SUBNET MASK

(000.000.000.000)

4 GATEWAY ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

5 SET IP ADD RANGE

Controlling Machine Access Using IPv4 addresses

OFF

ON

1 IP ADDRESS 1

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

2 IP ADDRESS 2

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

3 IP ADDRESS 3

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

4 IP ADDRESS 4

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

5 IP ADDRESS 5

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

6 IP ADDRESS 6

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

7 IP ADDRESS 7

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

8 IP ADDRESS 8

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

9 IP ADDRESS 9

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

10 IP ADDRESS 10

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (000.000.000.000)

6 DNS SETTINGS

Setting IPv4 DNS

1 DNS SERVER SET

1 PRIM. DNS SERVER

IP address (000.000.000.000)

2 SECOND DNS SERVER

IP address (000.000.000.000)

2 HOST/DOMAIN NAME

1 HOST NAME

Maximum 47 characters

2 DOMAIN NAME

Maximum 47 characters

3 DNS DYNAMIC SET

1 DNS DYNA. UPDATE

  • OFF
  • ON

2 IPv6 SETTINGS

1 USE IPv6

  • OFF
  • ON
Setting the Use of IPv6

2 STATELESS ADD SET

  • OFF
  • ON
Setting the Use of Stateless Address

3 MANUAL ADD SET

Setting IPv6 Address Manually

1 USE MANUAL ADD

  • OFF
  • ON

2 MANUAL ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

3 PREFIX LENGTH

0-128 (64)

4 DEF. ROUTER ADD

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

4 USE DHCPv6

  • OFF
  • ON
Setting the Use of DHCPv6

5 PING COMMAND

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000) Checking Network Connection (IPv6)

6 SET IP ADD RANGE

Controlling Machine Access Using IPv6 addresses

OFF

ON

1 IP ADDRESS 1

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

4 PREFIX LENGTH

  • OFF
  • ON (0-128 (64))

2 IP ADDRESS 2

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

4 PREFIX LENGTH

  • OFF
  • ON (0-128 (64))

3 IP ADDRESS 3

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

4 PREFIX LENGTH

  • OFF
  • ON (0-128 (64))

4 IP ADDRESS 4

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

4 PREFIX LENGTH

  • OFF
  • ON (0-128 (64))

5 IP ADDRESS 5

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

4 PREFIX LENGTH

  • OFF
  • ON (0-128 (64))

6 IP ADDRESS 6

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

4 PREFIX LENGTH

  • OFF
  • ON (0-128 (64))

7 IP ADDRESS 7

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

4 PREFIX LENGTH

  • OFF
  • ON (0-128 (64))

8 IP ADDRESS 8

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

4 PREFIX LENGTH

  • OFF
  • ON (0-128 (64))

9 IP ADDRESS 9

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

4 PREFIX LENGTH

  • OFF
  • ON (0-128 (64))

10 IP ADDRESS 10

1 PERMIT/REJECT

  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2 START IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

3 END IP ADDRESS

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

4 PREFIX LENGTH

  • OFF
  • ON (0-128 (64))

7 DNS SETTINGS

Setting IPv6 DNS

1 DNS SERVER SET

1 PRIM. DNS SERVER

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

2 SECOND DNS SERVER

IP address (0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000)

2 HOST/DOMAIN NAME

1 SAME HOST/DOMAIN

  • OFF
  • ON

2 HOST NAME

Maximum 47 characters (CanonDF40DF)

3 DOMAIN NAME

Maximum 47 characters

3 DNS DYNAMIC SET

1 DNS DYNA. UPDATE

  • OFF
  • ON

1 REG. MANUAL ADD

  • OFF
  • ON

2 REG. STATEFUL ADD

  • OFF
  • ON

3 LPD PRINT

  • OFF
  • ON
LPD (Settings from the Machine)

4 RAW PRINT

  • OFF
  • ON
RAW (Settings from the Machine)

5 Bonjour SETTINGS

  • OFF
  • ON
Bonjour (Settings from the Machine)

1 Bonjour NAME

Maximum 63 characters (Canon MF4360-4390 (DF:40:DE))

2 PRIORITY PROTOCOL

  • LPR
  • RAW

6 USE HTTP

  • OFF
  • ON
Setting the Use of HTTP

7 PORT NO. SET.

  • 1 LPD (0-65535 (515))
  • 2 RAW (0-65535 (9100))
  • 3 HTTP (0-65535 (80))
  • 4 SNMP (0-65535 (161))
Setting Port Number

8 PERMIT RX MAC ADD

Limiting Machine Access to a Certain MAC Address

ON

  • 1 PERMIT RX ADD1 (00-00-00-00-00-00)
  • 2 PERMIT RX ADD2 (00-00-00-00-00-00)
  • 3 PERMIT RX ADD3 (00-00-00-00-00-00)
  • 4 PERMIT RX ADD4 (00-00-00-00-00-00)
  • 5 PERMIT RX ADD5 (00-00-00-00-00-00)

OFF

2 SNMP SETTINGS

Setting SNMP

1 USE SNMP

  • OFF
  • ON

2 COMMUNITY NAME 1

Maximum 15 characters (public)

3 COMMUNITY NAME 2

Maximum 15 characters

4 SNMP WRITABLE 1

  • OFF
  • ON

5 SNMP WRITABLE 2

  • OFF
  • ON

3 ETHERNET DRIVER

Setting Speed and Duplex

1 AUTO DETECT

  • AUTO
  • MANUAL

1 COMMUNICATN MODE

  • HALF DUPLEX
  • FULL DUPLEX

2 ETHERNET TYPE

  • 10 BASE-T
  • 100 BASE-TX

2 MAC ADDRESS

Mac address

4 VIEW IP ADDRSSS

1 IPv4

  • 1 IP ADDRESS
  • 2 SUBNET MASK
  • 3 GATEWAY ADDRESS
Confirming IPv4 Address Settings and Checking IPv4 Connection

2 IPv6

  • 1 LINK LOCAD ADD (IP ADDRESS, PREFIX LENGTH)
  • 2 STATELESS ADD.1 (IP ADDRESS, PREFIX LENGTH)
  • 3 STATELESS ADD.2 (IP ADDRESS, PREFIX LENGTH)
  • 4 STATELESS ADD.3 (IP ADDRESS, PREFIX LENGTH)
  • 5 STATELESS ADD.4 (IP ADDRESS, PREFIX LENGTH)
  • 6 STATELESS ADD.5 (IP ADDRESS, PREFIX LENGTH)
  • 7 STATELESS ADD.6 (IP ADDRESS, PREFIX LENGTH)
  • 8 STATEFUL ADDRESS (IP ADDRESS, PREFIX LENGTH)
  • 9 DEF. ROUTER ADD (IP ADDRESS)
Confirming Link local Address

Confirming Stateless Address

Confirming Stateful Address

Confirming Default Router Address

5 STARTUP TIME SET.

0-300SEC (0SEC) Setting Startup Time
4 COMMUNICATIONS

1 TX START SPEED

2400bps, 4800bps, 7200bps, 9600bps, 14400bps, 33600bps Send Start Speed (Fax)

2 RX START SPEED

2400bps, 4800bps, 7200bps, 9600bps, 14400bps, 33600bps Receive Start Speed (Fax)

3 MEMORY LOCK

  • OFF
  • ON
Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception) (Fax)

1 PASSWORD

Seven digits

2 MEMORY RX TIME

  • OFF
  • ON

MEM. RX START TIME

  • HOUR (00-23)
  • MINUTE (00-59)

MEM. RX END TIME

  • HOUR (00-23)
  • MINUTE (00-59)
5 ACCESS TO DEST.

1 RESTRICT REDIAL

  • OFF
  • ON
Restricting Redial

2 CONFIRM FAX NO.

  • OFF
  • ON
Confirming Entered Fax Numbers
6 PDL SELECT (PnP)
  • UFRII
  • UFRII (XPS)
Introduction to Using Print Functions
7 UPDATE FIRMWARE This function is only used when the firmware needs to be updated.

* MF4380dn/MF4370dn only